School of Out of Body Travel A Practical Guidebook by Michael Raduga (OBE, Astran Projection, Soul Travel)

1
I
School of Out-of-Body Travel
A Practical Guidebook
Michael Raduga
www.obe4u.com
Translated by
Peter Orange
This e-book is FREE, so feel free to distribute it!
Send it to all your friends!
Post it on your sites and blogs!
For disability:
The Phase is your new life without any borders
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other
works of M.Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com
2
Table of Contents:
Part 1..............................................................................................5
ntering the Phase !tate.................................................................5
"hapter 1 # $eneral %ackground..............................................5
"hapter 2 # &ndirect Techni'ues.............................................1(
"hapter ) # *irect Techni'ues................................................5+
"hapter + # %ecoming "onscious ,hile *reaming...............-.
"hapter 5 # /on0autonomous Methods...................................(.
Part &&.............................................................................................1
Managing the Out0of0%ody 1perience........................................1
"hapter - 0 *eepening..............................................................1
"hapter ( 0 Maintaining........................................................122
"hapter 3 0 Primary skills......................................................11+
"hapter . 0 Translocation and 4inding Ob5ects.....................1)2
"hapter 12 0 6pplication.......................................................1+5
Part &&&........................................................................................1-5
6u1iliary &nformation................................................................1-5
"hapter 11 # 7seful Tips.......................................................1-5
"hapter 12 # Practitioners8 1periences...............................1(2
"hapter 1) 0 Putting a 4ace on the Phenomenon..................1.(
"hapter 1+ # 4inal Test.........................................................22+
6ppendi1....................................................................................21+
)
%uy hard copy of this e0book on www.obe4u.com
FOREWOR
This guidebook is the result of ten
years of e1tremely acti9e personal practice
and study of the out0of0body
phenomenon:the phase;< coupled with
ha9ing successfully taught it to thousands
of people. & know all of the obstacles and
problems that are usually run into when
getting to know this phenomenon< and
ha9e tried to protect future practitioners
from them in this book.
This guidebook was not created for
those who prefer light< empty reading. &t is for those who would
like to learn something. &t contains no speculations or stories< only
dry< hard facts and techni'ues in combination with a completely
pragmatic approach and clear procedures for action. They ha9e all
been successfully 9erified by a 9ast number of practitioners that
often had no prior e1perience. &n order to achie9e the same result<
it is only necessary to read through each section thoroughly and
complete the assignments.
The book is beneficial not only for beginners< but also for
those who already know what it feels like to ha9e an out0of0body
encounter and ha9e a certain amount of e1perience< as this
guidebook is de9oted not only to entering the state< but also
e'ually dedicated to controlling it.
"ontrary to popular opinion< there is nothing difficult
about this phenomenon if one tries to attain it with regular and
right effort. On a9erage< results are reached in less than a week if
attempts are made e9ery day. More often than not< the techni'ues
work in literally a couple of attempts.
Michael Raduga
Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel
January 11, 2!
+
The School of Out-of-body Travel
Seminars in California, NY and around the world:
More: www.school.obe4u.com
Open your branch of the School in your city
More: http://school.obe4u.com/
5
Part !
E"teri"# the Pha$e State
%hapter ! & Ge"eral Back#rou"d
Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the
pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for
self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo%
&'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212 Transfor#ation*) +t
also contains #any illustrative e,a#ples fro# the author-s o$n
personal e,perience)
T'E ESSE(%E OF T'E P'ASE P'E(O)E(O(
The term phase state :or simply phase; encompasses a
number of widely known dissociati9e phenomena< many of which
are referred to by 9arious terms< such as astral or out-of-"ody
e,perience. This concept also includes the more pragmatic term
lucid drea#ing< but does not always e1ist in the sense and form
implied by that e1pression. =ence< the term phase has been
introduced to ease the study of phenomena that e1ist beyond
habitual # and often unfair 0 associations and stereotypes. The
term out-of-"ody e,perience is accurate to the e1tent that it
describes the sensation felt by a person e1periencing the phase
phenomenon.
. phase has t$o pri#ary attri"utes/ 1)0 practitioners
possess full, conscious a$areness during the e,perience, and 2)0
practitioners recogni1e a genuine separation fro# the physical
"ody)
!imultaneously< the degree to which practitioners percei9e
the phase en9ironment affects the le9el of sensory e1periences
therein< which often occur in a higher form than the sensory
e1periences of wakefulness. This concept is difficult to imagine
-
without firsthand e1perience of the phase. 6nd so< it is not
without reason that this practice is considered to be a higher state
of self0hypnosis or meditation< and is often referred to under
different names as the highest possible human achie9ement in
9arious religious and mystical mo9ements :yoga< %uddhism< etc.;.
&n essence< the phase is an une1plored state of mind where
one is unable to control and feel his physical body. &nstead< his
space perception is filled with realistic phantom e1periences.
Interesting Fact!
Sensations in the phase state can
"e so realistic that practitioners $ho
unintentionally enter phase often "elieve
they are still in the physical "ody, that
the e,perience is occurring in the
$a%ing state) These types of unintended
e,cursions #ost often occur at night or
early in the #orning)

&t is belie9ed that up to one 'uarter of the human
population has encountered this phenomenon. =owe9er< if
9ariations and different degrees of intensity of the state are taken
into consideration< it may be safely assumed that e9eryone has
encountered the phase. !ince the phase is a rare sub5ect of study<
(
many who inad9ertently enter it do not reali>e what has taken
place once they return to wakefulness. Many do not assign any
significance to the occurrence of a phase en9ironment that is not
fully formed because shallow phases don8t lea9e the same 5olting
impression as deep states. lusi9e as the phase may seem< this is
an e1tremely common phenomenon< accessible to anyone willing
to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of achie9ing
and maintaining the phase.
W'* E(TER T'E P'ASE+
!uch a 'uestion can only arise from not fully
understanding the properties of the phenomenon and its nature.
,hen one suddenly understands at a certain moment that he is
5ust as real as he normally is< and is standing somewhere that is
not in the physical world with his same hands and body< and can
touch e9erything around him and discern fine details< such much
emotion stirs up inside him that no 'uestions arise at all. This is
the #ost a#a1ing e,perience that a person can attain2
The initial phase encounter is always 5olting and
sometimes frightening. *epending on the indi9idual< fear
e1perienced during initial encounters with the phase occurs in
about one0third of all cases. 9en 9eteran practitioners encounter
fear< which speaks to the profound nature of the phase state.
,ith time< as rapture ebbs and emotions wane< thoughts
turn from the fact of the phenomenon itself towards how to
somehow use it. 6nd here< a fantastically di9erse field of practical
application opens up before the practitioner. These applications #
which this book communicates # are not to be associated with the
many unpro9en and dubious methods often described in sundry
esoteric literature. The information presented herein is 9erifiable<
practical< and attainable.
,hate9er the nature of the phase 0 a state of mind< or
perhaps an e1ternal e1perience 0 this is the sole opportunity to?
9isit any part of the world or uni9erse@ see people who are out0of0
reach in real life< including relati9es< the deceased< celebrities<
and 9arious creatures@ communicate with the enormous resources
of the subconscious mind and obtain information from it@ reali>e
3
desires that are unattainable in real life@ model artistic
productions@ influence physiology< and more. These are not dull
e1periences. They are eminently personal and real.
T'E ,IFEST*,E OF A PRA%TITIO(ER
&t must be said that 9arious diets< e1ercises< rituals< and so
forth do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper
practice of the phase. /aturally e1istent psychological and
physiological comfort is of the utmost importance. Thus< methods
recommending o9ereating< under0eating< or tormenting oneself
with 9arious diets and strange e1ercises are useless and ultimately
detrimental to a practitioner8s wellness and balance< in9ariably
producing a negati9e impact to the effecti9eness of techni'ues
taught in this guidebook. 6dditionally< no meaningful association
has been found between practice of the phase and what may be
construed as Abad habitsB. Regardless of a lifestyle8s null effect
on phase achie9ement< a healthy< acti9e lifestyle will always be
recommended to en5oy a good 'uality of li9ing.
Interesting Fact!
+f one "elieves that it is necessary
to position one3s "ed $ith the head"oard
facing the 4orth$est or so#e other
direction in order to have #ore effective
out-of-"ody e,periences, then doing so
$ill invaria"ly have a positive effect on
results) 5o$ever, the issue at hand is not
the positioning of the "ody, "ut a "elief
that is a%in to an intention, $hich in turn
is enor#ously i#portant)
&t has been obser9ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle
increases the fre'uency of genuine< lasting phase e1periences.
!leeping normally and soundly is the most basic e1ample of a
lifestyle choice that produces direct< positi9e impact on results<
especially when a practitioner commits to a full nightCs rest
se9eral times a week.
.
A,GORIT') FOR )ASTERI(G T'E P'ASE
6 no9ice practitioner must understand the procedure for
learning and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of
se9eral primary steps< each of which is a uni'ue science unto
itself.

1. The first and most important step addresses the
techni'ues used to enter the phase state. &t is not necessary to
master e9ery type of entrance techni'ue :direct< indirect<
dream consciousness;. Dearning and applying the easiest
techni'ues pro9ides the necessary prere'uisites to more
ad9anced methods. &f so desired< it is possible to try more
difficult entrance techni'ues in parallel with the mo9ing on to
the subse'uent steps for mastering the phase.
2. "ontrary to popular opinion< the need for
conscious techni'ues does not cease upon phase entrance. &t is
absolutely necessary to learn and apply methods for
deepening the phase to achie9e a consistently hyper0realistic
en9ironment. 4ailing to apply deepening techni'ues almost
guarantees that e1periences will be dull< uninteresting< and
subse'uent practice short0li9ed. Practitioners should
immediately learn and apply deepening techni'ues after
mastering any one entrance method.
). The third step in9ol9es mastering techni'ues for
maintaining the phase< as without them the a9erage person
would ha9e phase e1periences of much shorter duration than
is possible. ,hen in the phase< the 'uestion of how to lea9e it
almost ne9er occurs. On the contrary< one is normally thrust
from it in the course of se9eral seconds if one simply does
nothing.
+. 6fter learning all the necessary techni'ues for
mastering the phase state< it is time to learn and apply
methods of control< which encompass the ability to
translocate< find and interact with ob5ects< influence
surroundings< and so forth.
12
5. Once the pre9iously noted steps ha9e been
accomplished< a practitioner may proceed to apply phase
e1periences to enhance e9eryday life. O9er the course of this
guidebook< we will e1amine do>ens of these 9aluable
applications in great detail.
,ith basic skills mastered< remember that practicing the
phase is worthwhile and effecti9e only when the results are
consistent. &f a practitioner enters the phase only once a month<
the e1perience will be too emotional to allow the obser9ation of
important principles and methodologies. The phase should be
encountered at least once a week. ,orking toward a le9el higher
than a weekly phase entry is ambitious< e9en beneficial.
Realistically< two to four phase e1periences per week might be
considered the le9el of a grandmaster< but this is far from the
upward boundary.
6s a rule< no9ice practitioners achie9e the phase less often
than is desired. =owe9er< with regular attempts< success occurs
more and more fre'uently< which should help alle9iate any
frustration resulting from failed attempts.
T*PES OF TE%'(I-.ES
There are three primary types of techni'ues that make it
possible to enter the phase? direct< indirect and drea#
consciousness. These methods are performed while lying down or
reclining< eyes closed< the body in a state of total rela1ation.
11
Interesting Fact!
Often, people have an out-of-
"ody e,perience $ithout prior
%no$ledge or "elief in the pheno#enon)
+t 6ust happens, and a large "ody of
evidence has "een gathered to support
this fact) 7ven #ore interesting is that
spontaneous e,periences often occur
after a "rief study of #aterial a"out the
topic, li%e this guide"oo%)))

8irect techni9ues are perfor#ed $ithout any noticea"le
lapse in consciousness) :hile practicing direct techni9ues, a
lapse into sleep for less than ; #inutes is not considered a "reach
of the techni9ue)
%y definition< direct techni'ues encompass the
performance of specific actions for a pre0defined inter9al of time.
!uccessfully applied< direct methods result in a phase entrance
without passing through any intermediary states. 4or .2E of the
population< these techni'ues are the most difficult because the
mind naturally e1ists in an e1cessi9ely acti9e state. &t has been
clearly pro9en within the !chool8s student body that no9ice
practitioners do not benefit from beginning a training regimen
with direct techni'ues. This is because direct techni'ues re'uire a
thorough understanding and masterful application of indirect
techni'ues in order to be effecti9e. The incorrect notion that the
phase state is e1tremely difficult to enter is due to the fact that
people are more often drawn to the more difficult direct
techni'ues. &t is always better to approach direct techni'ues only
after becoming e1pert in the use of indirect techni'ues.

+ndirect techni9ues are techni9ues that are put into
practice upon a$a%ening fro# sleep)
The effecti9eness of indirect techni'ues is not dependent
on the length of the prere'uisite sleep cycle. &ndirect techni'ues
can be used while e1iting a full night8s sleep< after a daytime
catnap< or following se9eral hours of deep sleep. The most
12
important thing is that there is a lapse of consciousness into sleep
before implementing the techni'ues.
&ndirect techni'ues are the easiest techni'ues to practice<
which is why many practitioners use them to enter the phase.
!leep naturally pro9ides the mind with deep rela1ation< which is
often difficult to ac'uire by other methods. !ince sleep is re'uired
to perform indirect techni'ues< it is a con9enient< oft0occurring
means to conduct e1periments with the phase. /o9ice
practitioners benefit greatly from the use of indirect techni'ues<
and learn firsthand the possibility of phase entrance.

8rea# consciousness is ac9uired "y techni9ues that allo$
entrance to the phase through $hat is co##only referred to as
lucid drea#ing)
&n this case< the phase begins when the awareness that a
dream is occurring happens within the dream itself. 6fter
becoming conscious while dreaming< se9eral types of actions can
be performed< including returning to the body and rolling out<
which will be described later. ,hen deepening techni'ues are
applied in the conte1t of a conscious dream< the sensory
perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal wakefulness.
Techni'ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually
categori>ed separately from methods used to perform out0of0body
tra9el@ in practice< howe9er< it is apparent that the characteristics
of dream consciousness and out0of0body tra9el are identical<
which places both phenomena directly in the phase. These
practices are difficult because< unlike other techni'ues< they do
not in9ol9e specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 6
large measure of preparatory steps must be obser9ed that re'uire
time and effort without any guarantee of results. =owe9er< dream
consciousness techni'ues are not as difficult as direct techni'ues.
Moreo9er< the ma5ority of practitioners< whether using indirect or
direct techni'ues< e1perience spontaneous awareness while
dreaming without ha9ing to apply techni'ues aimed at dream
consciousness.
&n addition to the techni'ues described abo9e< there are
also non0autonomous means and tools? 9arious de9ices< programs<
1)
e1ternal influences< and so forth< which can be used to enter the
phase. &t is necessary to mention that these are only useful to
practitioners who are able to enter the phase without
supplementary assistance.
Farious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha9e
been recommended to assist phase entrance< though using them is
unlikely to do any good< and use of these has ne9er yielded the
effect that can be achie9ed through unadulterated practice. 6s
such< the use of a chemical crutch is regarded here as completely
unacceptable.
%O(TRAI(I%ATIO(S
1act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous
# or e9en safe 0 does not e1ist@ there has ne9er been an
e1hausti9e< controlled study to pro9e either supposition.
=owe9er< since the phase e1ists at the fringes of naturally0
occurring states of mind< it can hardly be assumed dangerous.
/otably< the phase is accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement
:RM;< which e9ery human e1periences for up to 2 hours each
night< and this begins to e1plain the phase e1perience as entirely
safe and natural.
6lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the
phase on the physical mind and body@ namely< the emotional
effects that can occur during the onset of the phase state.
Phase entry is a 9ery profound< incredible e1perience that
may induce fear< which is in9oked by a natural instinct for self0
preser9ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true
for no9ices and those poorly ac'uainted with the nature of the
phenomenon and techni'ues used to control it. ,ithout
knowledge and proper practice< a fear0induced reaction can
escalate into full0blown terror. 6fter all< while in the phase<
fantasy 'uickly becomes reality< and reticent fears can take on
hyper0realistic 'ualities. ,hen this occurs< it8s not the phase
en9ironment< but the fear that is treacherous. &t goes without
saying that fear is a to1ic influence< especially to sensiti9e souls<
the elderly< and people with physical ailments< like certain
cardio9ascular conditions. This does not mean that persons in
1+
these groups should abstain from practicing the phase. The
solution is to learn about and a9oid common stressors associated
with the practice< know the mechanics of controlling ob5ects< and
understand the principles of making an emergency e1it.
$i9en the possibility of negati9e phase e1periences< it
could be ad9ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to
fifteen minutes< though it is 'uite e1ceptional to maintain the
phase for such duration. Proposed time limits are entirely
theoretical and moti9ated by the fact that natural RM does not
normally last longer than fifteen minutes< and< at the risk of side
effects due to the alteration of natural cycles< e1periments
directed at unnaturally prolonging RM are not recommended.
RE%O))E(ATIO(S
FOR .SI(G T'E G.IEBOO/
*uring classroom instruction at the !chool of Out0of0
%ody Tra9el< se9eral key factors are known to produce positi9e
and negati9e effects toward the likelihood of success during
indi9idual practice?
Po$itive Effect o" Practice (e#ative Effect o" Practice
6ttenti9e< thorough study of the
course material
=asty and inattenti9e study of
course materials.
"onsistent work with practical
elements.
&nconsistent application of
techni'ues.
*iligent completion of technical
elements.
6ppro1imating the techni'ues
outside of recommended
guidelines.
6 rela1ed approach to the sub5ect
matter.
6 hysterical approach to the
matter< AidGe fi1eB.
Heeping a 5ournal of all initial
attempts< followed by recording
successful phase entrances.
6 lack of personal analysis when
problems or a lack of success are
encountered.
6dhering to the recommended
number of daily entrance
attempts.
1cessi9e number of attempts per
day.
15
Regular attempts and practice. !poradic practice regimen.
7nderstanding that the author
knows his field well
A& also know e9erything & need to
and will do as & wantI. This
attitude is good only for those who
ha9e a great amount of real
practical e1perience. Reading a lot
on the sub5ect or simply ha9ing
knowledge of it is not e1perience.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER !
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hich alternati9e states are included in the term
AphaseBJ
2. =ow does the phase differ from out0of0body tra9elJ
). &s the perception of reality different in waking life
than in the phase worldJ
+. *oes the phase ha9e applications to day0to0day lifeJ
5. ,hat skills must be learned before proceeding to
practical use of the phaseJ
-. =ow many types of autonomous phase entrance
techni'ues are thereJ
(. ,hat is the difference between direct and indirect
techni'uesJ
3. ,hich techni'ues are easiest for the ma5ority of
practitionersJ
.. &s it worth trusting 9arious de9ices and programs
that promise to be able to help one enter the phase
stateJ ,hy or why notJ
12. !hould one eat meat when practicing the phaseJ
Ta$k$
1. Try to remember if you ha9e e1perienced phase
encounters in the past.
1-
2. &f you ha9e encountered the phase< what type of
techni'ue gained entrance@ direct< indirect< or
conscious dreamingJ
). &f possible< ask some friends and ac'uaintances
about the sub5ect of out0of0body tra9el or conscious
dreaming. *o any of them remember a similar
e1perienceJ ,hat was it likeJ
Su"stantially #ore in-depth infor#ation on the
pheno#enon, the author and his school, as $ell as guidance for
self-study and independent practice #ay "e found in the "oo%
&'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212 Transfor#ation*) +t
also contains #any illustrative e,a#ples fro# the author-s o$n
personal e,perience)
1(
%hapter 1 & I"direct Tech"i2ue$
T'E %O(%EPT OF I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
$enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun with the
easiest< most accessible methods? indirect techni'ues< which are
conscious actions performed upon awakening from sleep. !ome
critics incorrectly assume that indirect techni'ues are not ideal<
and prefer to start with direct techni'ues. =owe9er< doing so
pro9ides no guarantee for success and results in a large amount of
wasted time and effort. Starting practice $ith indirect techni9ues
guarantees entrance into the phase)
6 specific uni9ersal techni'ue that suits e9ery practitioner
is a myth since indi9iduals differ widely in personality<
psychology< and learning speed. =owe9er< there is a relati9ely
easy uni9ersal algorithm< or procedure< that accounts for the
characteristics of each person and allows for the most rational<
effecti9e way to attain the initial phase entrances. This algorithm
encompasses cyclic practicing of the indirect techni'ues co9ered
in this chapter. ,ithout e1ception< these techni'ues 0 despite their
9arying degrees of difficulty 0 are suitable for e9ery practitioner
who wishes to e1perience the phase.
Results can be e1pected immediately following the first
few attempts@ howe9er< to achie9e measurable results< an a9erage
of fi9e daily< conscious attempts must be made. Making more
than fi9e attempts o9er the course of a day is fine< too. There is
nothing difficult to understand about performing the techni'ues
since they are clearly laid out and based on real internal
processes. Re#ar%a"ly, due to correctly practiced indirect
techni9ues, #ore than half of students at the live school attain
phase entrance after only t$o days)
13
Interesting Fact!
Many e,perienced practitioners
prefer to "ypass the effort associated
$ith direct techni9ues and hone their
s%ills through the sole use of indirect
techni9ues)

&n order to ensure that one8s efforts are most fruitful and
producti9e< we are going to indi9idually e1amine each step and
principle behind the actions in great detail. Det us start from a
description of the techni'ues themsel9es< which will actually
apply practically 5ust as much to direct techni'ues as to indirect
techni'ues@ as they only differ in character and length of
application.
There are plenty of techni'ues< so after practicing all of
the indirect techni'ues presented in this chapter< a practitioner
should be able to choose three or four of the most straightforward<
indi9idually effecti9e methods.
!eparation techni'ues will be e1amined later. They are
completely different from usual techni'ues< which only bring one
into the phase< but do not necessarily themsel9es lead to
separation from the body. &t is often also necessary to know how
to stop percei9ing one8s physical body after employing these
techni'ues.
&t is necessary to understand when to employ these
techni'ues< and the importance of waking from sleep without
opening the eyes or mo9ing the body. 6ttempting to enter the
phase immediately upon awakening must be learned and practiced
to mastery since it constitutes the main barrier to successful
practice.
6fter e1amining the peripheral information surrounding
indirect techni'ues< the cycles of indirect techni'ues will be
e1amined< including what there are< how they work< and how they
are best used. !uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of
performing these cycles. =owe9er< there are e1ceptions< and it is
not completely necessary to proceed with these cycles if oneCs
own mind somehow hints what e1actly one should start from<
which we will also e1amine separately.
1.

PRI)AR* I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
4ota Bene2 The techni'ues described below are the simple
components of indirect techni'ue cycles. &mplementing each
techni'ue8s description is far from effecti9e. Of the list gi9en
below< it behoo9es the indi9idual practitioner to choose the most
comprehensible and interesting techni'ues< then acti9ely study
and apply the instructions for use.
OBSER3I(G I)AGES
Te$ti"# I"dividual Effective"e$$
&mmediately after waking from sleep< remain motionless<
eyes closed. Obser9e the blank space behind the eyes for ) to 5
seconds and try to locate recogni>able pictures< images< or
symbols. &f nothing appears during this e1ercise< the techni'ue
should be substituted. &f something appears< continue to passi9ely
obser9e the images. Meanwhile< the images will become
increasingly realistic< literally en9eloping the practitioner. *o not
aggressi9ely e1amine the details of the image< or it will 9anish or
change. The image should be e1perienced as a panorama< taking
22
e9erything in. Obser9e the images as long as the 'uality and
realism increases. *oing so yields two possible results? the
practitioner becomes part of the surroundings< and has achie9ed
the phase< or the image becomes borderline or absolutely realistic<
and separation from the physical body is possible.

Trai"i"#
To train the use of this techni'ue< lie down in the dark<
eyes closed< and obser9e the blackness for se9eral minutes<
identifying any specific images that may arise from simple spots
or floaters< and then gradually transition to whole pictures< scenes<
or scenarios. ,ith practice< this techni'ue is 9ery easy and
straightforward. 6 common mistake made during practice of this
techni'ue is when the practitioner aggressi9ely attempts to
con5ure images 9ersus passi9ely obser9ing what is naturally
presented.
P'A(TO) WIGG,I(G 4)O3E)E(T5
eyes closed. Try to wiggle a part of the body for ) to 5 seconds<
but without using any muscles. &f nothing mo9es during the
attempt< try a different techni'ue. &f a sensation of wiggling
occurs< e9en in the slightest< continue to employ the techni'ue<
stri9ing to increase the range of mo9ement as much as possible.
This techni'ue should be performed 9ery aggressi9ely< not
passi9ely. 6s soon as the range of mo9ement nears or e1ceeds
four inches 0 which may take 5ust se9eral seconds 0 the following
situations may arise? one momentarily finds oneself somehow in
the phase< or the wiggled part of the body begins to mo9e freely.
The occurrence of mo9ement during practice of this techni'ue
allows the practitioner to transition to a separation techni'ue and
attempt to lea9e the body.
,hile practicing phantom wiggling< strong 9ibrations may
occur< amid which separation may be attempted. !ounds also
often arise< allowing the opportunity to practice listening in<
which can lead to phase entrance.
21
The phantom wiggling techni'ue is not meant to produce
an imagined mo9ement by a phantom body. The point of the
techni'ue is to attempt the mo9ement of a physical body part
without using muscular action. That is< the focus should rest upon
an internal intention of mo9ement without physical action. ,hen
the sensation occurs< it differs little from its real counterpart and
is often accompanied by hea9iness and resistance. $enerally<
there is 9ery little range of mo9ement at first< but with
concentrated effort the range of mo9ement noticeably increases.
&t does not matter which part of the body is used to
e1ercise phantom mo9ement. &t may be the whole body or 5ust
one finger. /either is the speed of the mo9ement important.
&ncreased range of percei9ed mo9ement is the aim of the
techni'ue.
Trai"i"#
To train the techni'ue of phantom wiggling< rela1 a hand
for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. Then<
aggressi9ely en9ision the following hand mo9ements< without
mo9ing any muscles< for two to three minutes each? rotating< up0
down< left0right< e1tending the fingers and drawing the fingers
together< clenching and unclenching a fist. /o sensations will
occur at first. $radually< the sensation of muscular action will
become so apparent that the percei9ed mo9ement will be
indistinguishable from real mo9ement. *uring the first training
attempts< practitioners are often tempted to open their eyes to see
if actual mo9ement is occurring # that8s how real the sensation
feels.
,ISTE(I(G I(
eyes closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. *o this for ) to 5
seconds without mo9ing and without opening the eyes. &f nothing
happens during this period of time< switch to another techni'ue. &f
any sounds like bu>>ing< humming< ra9ing< hissing< whistling<
tinkling< or melodies occur< listen attenti9ely. ,ith results< the
22
sound will increase in 9olume. Disten in as long as there is some
dynamism in the 9olume of the sound. ,hen the sound stops< or
the noise becomes loud enough< a separation techni'ue may be
attempted. !ometimes< the noise itself throws one into the phase
while listening. 6t a certain stage< sounds may be e1tremely loud
and ha9e e9en been described as comparable to the roar of a 5et0
engine.
The action of listening in consists of acti9ely and
attenti9ely e1ploring a sound< the whole of its tonality and range<
and how it reacts to the listener.
There is an optional techni'ue known as forced li$te"i"#
i"< where it is simply necessary to strongly want to hear noise<
and meanwhile make intuiti9e internal efforts< which< as a rule<
are correct. Performed correctly< forced sounds will intensify the
same way as those percei9ed with the standard listening in
techni'ue.
Trai"i"#
&n order to practice listening in< lie down in a silent place<
eyes closed< and listen for sounds originating in the head. These
attempts are usually crowned with success within se9eral minutes
of trying< and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely
e9eryone has within. One simply has to know how to tune in to it.
ROTATIO(
eyes closed. &magine the physical body is rotating along an a1is
for 5 to 12 seconds. &f no unusual sensations occur< try another
techni'ue. &f 9ibrations occur during rotation or the mo9ement
suddenly feels realistic< then continue the rotation techni'ue as
long as there is progress in the sensation8s de9elopment. There
are se9eral possible outcomes when rotation is practiced. The
imagined rotation is replaced by a 9ery real sensation of rotating
along an imagined a1is. ,hen this occurs< a practitioner may
easily lea9e the body. The other outcome is the sudden presence
of strong 9ibrations or loud sounds< amid which separation from
2)
the body is possible. *uring rotation< separation has been known
to spontaneously occur and the practitioner enters the phase.

Trai"i"#
To practice rotation< imagine re9ol9ing around the head0
to0foot a1is for se9eral minutes while lying down< eyes closed. &t
is not necessary to focus on the 9isual effects of rotation or
minute sensations in the body. The key factor is the 9estibular
sensation that arises from internal rotation. 6s a rule< many
practitioners e1perience difficulty performing full rotation. One
person may be limited to .2 degrees of mo9ement where another
e1periences 132 degrees. ,ith consistent< correct practice< full
)-2 degree rotation will occur.

FOR%E FA,,I(G AS,EEP
eyes closed. Picture a swift< compulsory fall into sleep for 5 to 12
seconds< and then return to wakefulness< followed by an
aggressi9e attempt at separating from the physical body.
$enerally< after performing this techni'ue< the practitioner8s state
of mind 'uickly transitions between different states of brain.
!trong 9ibrations often occur when emerging from this Apseudo0
sleepB< where the likelihood of separation from the body is
increased< accompanied the opportunity to practice other
techni'ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e1ercise.
&n essence< forced falling asleep is a trick on the mind
designed to take ad9antage of the brain8s refle1i9e responses to
actions that immediately induce semi0conscious states that allow
easy entrance into the phase. mploying it is especially effecti9e
upon an e1tremely alert awakening< or after a mo9ement is
unintentionally made upon awakening.
4orced sleep is 'uite simple. &t re'uires a cessation of
internal dialogue< shifting mental focus away from e1ternal
stimuli< and a strong desire for a 'uick reentrance to the sleeping
state followed by renewed wakefulness after se9eral seconds. &n
order to understand how this is done< it is sufficient to recall how
2+
one had urgently made oneself fall asleep before< or how one had
fallen asleep after ha9ing been e1hausted< or after a long period of
sleep depri9ation.
6 common mistake in practice occurs when people fall
asleep after attempting the techni'ue< forgetting the necessary
desire to 'uickly return to consciousness.
SE%O(AR* I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
STRAI(I(G T'E BRAI(
eyes closed. Make 2 to ) s'uee>es straining the brain. This is
known as straining the brain. &f nothing happens< try another
techni'ue. &f 9ibrations occur during this e1ercise< try to mo9e the
9ibrations around the body and amplify them by continuing to
strain the brain. The stronger the 9ibrations< the higher the
probability that a separation techni'ue may be applied.
!pontaneous separation may occur. ,hile straining the brain< a
practitioner may e1perience the sounds necessary for transitioning
to a listening in techni'ue.
The 9ibrations that arise from straining the brain are 9ery
striking. &f there is any doubt as to whether the 9ibrations
happened< then most likely a practitioner did not e1perience them.
The 9ibrations may be described as an intense< painless electrical
current mo9ing through or gripping the body. 6t times< the
sensation of a total numbing of the body is e1perienced.

Trai"i"#
To practice straining the brain< lie down< eyes closed< and
attempt to strain the brain. *o not think about the fact that
actually s'uee>ing the brain is impossible. The imagined straining
should be spasmodic< rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire
brain or specific parts of it. *uring the process< a sensation of
pressure or e9en real strain arises in the brain. ,ith .5E of
practitioners< this strain usually occurs within the first few
minutes of e1ercise. This techni'ue should be committed to
25
memory when training so that it may be instantly recalled and
practiced upon awakening from sleep.
Practitioners often make the mistake of unintentionally
straining their facial and neck muscles instead of straining the
interior of their heads. This error should be a9oided at all costs<
lest it become a habit that frustrates genuine practice.

STRAI(I(G T'E BO* WIT'O.T .SI(G ).S%,ES

This techni'ue in9ol9es straining the whole body and
differs little from straining the brain. ,hen awakening from
sleep< make one to three attempts at straining the whole body<
refraining from actually fle1ing any physical muscle. &f nothing
happens< try another techni'ue. Fibrations may occur as a result<
and amplifying these by straining the body without using muscles
can induce a spontaneous separation from the body. ,hen the
9ibrations become strong enough< attempt a separation techni'ue.
!ounds often arise during the 9ibration which allow for listening
in and a subse'uent entrance to the phase.

Trai"i"#
To practice? while lying down< eyes closed< try to strain
the entire body without using physical muscles for se9eral
minutes. Tingling< internal pressure< and a strain on the brain
often occur during this e1ercise. Remember to a9oid straining any
real muscles. &f physical strain occurs< results may be forfeited in
the critical moment of fruition.
3IS.A,I6ATIO(
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< con5ure an intense desire to
see and literally create a specific ob5ect. The ob5ect should be
en9isioned at rest< about four to eight inches from the practitioner.
Dimit the 9isuali>ation to simple< familiar ob5ects< like an apple<
flower< sphere< or hand. !ometimes it is useful to imagine an
ob5ect floating 5ust abo9e the eyebrows instead of directly in
2-
front. &f nothing appears during this period of time< a different
techni'ue should be used.
&f an ob5ect appears< one should keep looking hard at it<
and at a certain moment one will reali>e that one is already
standing ne1t to it somewhere in the world of the phase. ,hen the
ob5ect becomes realistic< one can also try to separate from one8s
body on one8s own.

SE(SOR*-)OTOR 3IS.A,I6ATIO(
eyes closed. &magine acti9e< physical mo9ement for 12 to 15
seconds while touching an actual ob5ect and simultaneously
e1amining the imagined details of the room. &f nothing appears
during this period of time< a different techni'ue should be used. &f
real and imagined sensations become mi1ed< then continue the
practice until the imagined sensations o9ercome the primary
senses.
I)AGI(E )O3E)E(T
eyes closed. 4or 5 to 12 seconds< concentrate on 9isuali>ing any
of the following actions? wiggling< walking< running<
somersaulting< pulling a rope< or swimming. Try to imagine the
mo9ement as a realistic and acti9e e9ent during the practice
period. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue should be
employed. &f results occur in the form of the sensation of
mobility< the imagined mo9ement should be continued until it
becomes the dominant sensation. ,hen the mo9ement achie9es
primacy< it is accompanied by translocation to the phase. &f such a
translocation does not automatically occur< a separation techni'ue
is recommended.

I)AGI(E SE(SATIO(S
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< en9ision that a specific
2(
ob5ect is being held in the hand. &f nothing happens< a different
techni'ue should be practiced. &f the impression of shape and
weight become apparent< concentrate harder on the sensation<
trying to compound the e1perience. Once the ob5ect8s presence in
the hand achie9es a realistic 'uality< separation is possible.
=owe9er< it is preferable to continue handling the ob5ect. 6
practitioner is free to imagine any type of ob5ect that fits in the
hand. 1amples include a telephone< a drinking glass< a remote
control< a ball< a pen< or a bo1.
I)AGI(E SO.(S
7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening one8s eyes<
one should acti9ely try to hear a specific sound or word< e.g.
someone8s name or a melody. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue
should be changed for another one. &f sound arises< one should try
to listen in to it. ,hen it peaks in 9olume< one may try to
separate.
E*E )O3E)E(T
eyes closed. Perform two to fi9e sharp left0right or up0down eye
mo9ements. &f nothing happens< the techni'ue should be
e1changed for another. &f 9ibrations occur< separation may be
attempted after efforts to intensify the 9ibrations.
OT O( T'E FORE'EA
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< 9isuali>e a point in the
middle of the forehead. &f nothing happens< a different techni'ue
should be used. &f 9ibrations occur< they may be intensified by
using this techni'ue or by straining the brain< facilitating
separation from the body. 6lso< sounds may arise that allow the
practice of listening in.

FEAR )ET'O
23
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< imagine something horrific
and gra9eyard0related staying nearby< something graphic<
macabre< out of the worst nightmare imaginable. &f nothing
happens< a different techni'ue should be employed. =owe9er<
acute fear may occur< most likely forcing the practitioner into the
phase where a separation techni'ue may be applied. 6lternati9ely<
9ibrations or noise may arise and allow the use of other indirect
techni'ues. 6 common problem with the use of this techni'ue is
that fear often makes the practitioner so uncomfortable in the
phase that he desires nothing else than to return to wakefulness.

RE%A,,I(G T'E P'ASE STATE
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< recall the sensations that
accompanied a pre9ious phase e1perience. :This only works if the
practitioner has achie9ed phase entrance in the past.; ither
nothing will happen and a different techni'ue should be used or
these sensations will be recalled and separating from the body
may be tried 0 if it doesn8t occur spontaneously. Fibrations or
noise may also arise during this techni'ue< in which case listening
in or straining the brain may be practiced.
BREAT'I(G %O(%E(TRATIO(
eyes closed. 4or three to fi9e seconds< focus on breathing@ the rise
and fall of the rib cage< the inflation and deflation of the lungs<
the intake and escape of air. &f no results occur< a different
techni'ue should be used. &f 9ibrations< noise< or spontaneous
separation occur< the practice of this techni'ue should be
intensified and used to its full ad9antage.
SE,E%TI(G T'E RIG'T TE%'(I-.ES
2.
The ne1t step to mastering indirect techni'ues is choosing
the right techni'ues that suit indi9idual predispositions. There is
no point in going for one techni'ue or another only because they
look interesting and because someone wrote a lot or spoke a lot
about them. The choice should be based strictly upon what suits
an indi9idual practitioner.
Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni'ues<
practically only straining the brain works easily and 'uickly for
.5E of practitioners. 6ll other techni'ues work immediately for
only about 25E to 52E of practitioners during initial training.
=owe9er< after se9eral training sessions< each techni'ue yields
results for (5E of engaged practitioners.
One way or another< e9ery practitioner should identify a
certain set of techni'ues that works best. 6 set should consist of
no less than three techni'ues@ four or fi9e is e9en better to allow
more options and practical combinations. /on0working
techni'ues should not be discarded wholesale by the indi9idual
because they afford an opportunity to achie9e success through
new< pre9iously unresponsi9e e1periences.
To ensure the correct selection of techni'ues< each should
be separately practiced o9er a period of at least three days. To this
end< one should e1periment with each of the primary techni'ues
for 2 to 12 minutes before falling asleep< or e9en during the day.
&t is good to choose at least one secondary techni'ue practice.
This regimen allows a precise determination of the techni'ues
that will yield the best results for the practitioner. *uring the
process of selecting personali>ed techni'ues< a practitioner learns
and retains the techni'ues in an intimate< personal way< which
positi9ely affects how techni'ues are used during critical
moments.
&t is worth noting that the final selection of techni'ues
should be 9aried. 4or e1ample< choosing both straining the brain
and straining the body without using muscles is pointless because
they are practically one and the same. More often than not< they
will both either work or not work. This is why techni'ues should
in9ol9e 9arious types of sensory perception? 9isual< audio<
kinesthetic< 9estibular< imaginary sense perception< and internal
strain. Remember that priorities and goals change with time< and
)2
that a techni'ue that fell flat during initial attempts may
une1pectedly pro9e 9aluable later on. %e fle1ible. /o set of
techni'ues should be car9ed in stone. &n fact< the set may change
se9eral times o9er the first few weeks as the practitioner disco9ers
what produces the best indi9idual results.
To close this section< a list has been pro9ided< detailing
the most effecti9e indirect techni'ues. This list was compiled with
classroom data from the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el and may
pro9e helpful in determining an effecti9e set of indirect
techni'ues.
The )o$t Effective I"direct Tech"i2ue$ at School of Out-of-
Body Travel Se7i"ar$
Obser9ing &mages 15E
Phantom ,iggling 15E
Distening in 15E
Rotation 12E
!training the %rain 5E
!training the %ody ,ithout 7sing Muscles 5E
4orced 4alling 6sleep 5E
Mi1ture of Techni'ues 12E
Other Techni'ues 22E
SEPARATIO( TE%'(I-.ES
Det us begin with a totally shocking fact? during one0third
of successful indirect entries into the phase< it is not necessary to
perform any specific phase entry techni'ues< as separation
techni'ues are immediately successfulK This has been
statistically pro9en at !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el seminars and
in the analyses of other sources. "on9ersely< an incorrect
understanding of separation techni'ues may lead to undesirable
conse'uences. &t is possible for a practitioner to enter the phase
state and be unable to separate from the body. Therefore< it is 9ery
important to understand how separation techni'ues work since
they are often a key to success.
Interesting Fact!
)1
Relatively often, a practitioner
$ill try to e#ploy separation techni9ues
to no effect, ho$ever, he $ill later
une,pectedly understand that he had
"een lying in a different position than he
sensed that he $as in, and in fact, it had
only "een necessary for hi# to stand up)
This happens #ostly a#ong "eginners
and is indicative of an incorrect
understanding of separation techni9ues)

6t times a practitioner may only need to think about
separation and it happens. This is a rarity< which e1plains the
e1istence of a whole series of au1iliary techni'ues. The most
important separation techni'ues are rolling out< getting up<
climbing out< and le9itation.
RO,,I(G O.T
,hile awakening< attempt to roll o9er to the edge of the
bed or the wall without using any muscles. *on8t worry about
falling out of bed< hitting the wall< or be concerned with the
details of how this techni'ue should feel. Lust roll.
GETTI(G .P
7pon awakening< attempt to get out of bed without
physical e1ertion. This should be performed in a way that is most
comfortable for the practitioner.
%,I)BI(G O.T
,hile awakening< try to climb out of the body without
using any muscles. This techni'ue generally comes to mind when
a partial separation has been achie9ed through the use of other
techni'ues< or one part of the body has completely separated.

,E3ITATIO(
)2
7pon awakening< attempt to le9itate upward< parallel to
the bed. ,hile attempting to le9itate< do not wonder how it
should be accomplished@ e9eryone intuiti9ely knows how to
le9itate from their e1periences in dreams.
FA,,I(G O.T
Practically the same as le9itation? upon awakening< try to
sink down through the bed.
P.,,I(G O.T
=ere< upon awakening< try to e1it the body through the
head< as if escaping from a lidded cocoon.

BA%/WARS RO,,
6fter awakening< try to perform a backwards somersault
o9er the head without using any physical muscles.
B.,GE T'E E*ES8
7pon awakening< bulge out or widen the eyes without
opening them. 4rontal mo9ement toward separation may result.
!eparation techni'ues are united by a singular idea?
nothing should be imagined< mo9ement should be attempted
without the use of physical muscles. The techni'ues produce the
same sensations of mo9ement felt in real life. &f nothing happens
immediately after trying< then the techni'ue is not going to work<
though it may deli9er results at a later time. 6 practitioner will
instantly be able to recogni>e if the techni'ue has worked.
=owe9er< people are often unprepared for the realness of the
sensations and think that they are making a physical mo9ement
instead of reali>ing that a part or all of the body has separated.
6fter this unfortunate failure< careful analysis helps to understand
what happened and plan for a successful retry.
))
&f separation was incomplete or took place with some
difficulty< this is a signal that the techni'ue is being performed
correctly. !trength and aggressi9e effort are re'uired from this
point to achie9e complete separation. 4or e1ample< if some
mo9ement began and then stopped after ha9ing made some
progress< then one should go back and mo9e e9en harder once
again in the same direction.
&n order to practice separation techni'ues< lie down with
the eyes closed and attempt all of them o9er the course of se9eral
minutes. !eparation has likely been accomplished if no muscles
twitch or strain and a sensation of mo9ement occurs. There will
be a strong< almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a
mo9ement. /aturally< no physical mo9ement actually occurs and
the practitioner remains prone and immobile@ howe9er< at the
right moment< these actions will lead to an easy entrance into the
phase.
Interesting Fact!
.ppro,i#ately 1< to =< of the
ti#e that the phase is practiced, one
reali1es i##ediately upon a$a%ening
that one has already separated) This
#eans that one #ay already go
so#e$here and stand, lie do$n, sit
do$n, etc) This is not ho$ever "eco#ing
conscious in a drea#, "ut an actually
a$a%ening)
T'E BEST TI)E TO PRA%TI%E
The key to practice is the 'uantity and 'uality of attempts
made that hone a practitioner8s skills. There are se9eral windows
of time best suited for employing indirect techni'ues.
To begin< it should be stated that sleep follows a cyclical
pattern. ,e awaken e9ery hour0and0a0half and then 'uickly fall
asleep again< which gi9es rise to sleep cycles. 4urthermore< we
e1perience two primary stages of sleep? rapid eye mo9ement
:RM; sleep< and non0rapid eye mo9ement :/RM; sleep.
)+
/RM sleep includes many internal stages. The more we sleep<
the less the body needs deep /RM sleep< and the more time we
spend in RM sleep. Phase entrance is most likely to occur during
RM sleep.
The best way to implement indirect techni'ues is by the
deferred #ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep
cycle during its final stage and then disrupt it again after falling
back to sleep< which makes sleep light during the rest of the sleep
cycle. !leep accompanied by fre'uent interruptions can be put to
producti9e uses.
4or e1ample< if a practitioner :let8s call him Lack; goes to
sleep at midnight< then Lack should set an alarm for - o8clock in
the morning. 7pon awakening< Lack should engage in some sort
of physical acti9ity< like going to the bathroom< getting a drink of
water< or reading a few pages of this book. 6fterward< Lack
should go back to bed thinking about how< within the ne1t two to
four hours< he will wake up multiple times and make an attempt
to enter the phase during each awakening.
&f Lack goes to bed earlier< then his alarm clock should be
set back by that amount of time< since si1 hours of initial sleep is
the optimal length of time. &f Lack sleeps less than si1 hours< then
the second half of his night8s sleep will be too deep. &f Lack sleeps
longer than si1 hours< then there will be little time remaining for
attempts< or Lack may not e9en be able to fall asleep.
&f a practitioner naturally wakes up in a forceful manner< it
will be difficult to regain sleep. Thus< it will not be necessary for
)5
the practitioner to get out of bed with the aid of an alarm. The
practitioner should attempt to go right back to sleep.
/aturally< the deferred method is most applicable in cases
where it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires<
without ha9ing to wake up early. /ot e9eryone en5oys such
lu1ury on a daily basis< but nearly e9eryone has days off when
time may be set aside to practice the deferred method. +t is in
large #easure due to the deferred #ethod that classroo# courses
at the School of Out-of-Body Travel allo$ up to 2>= of class
participants to enter the phase in the course of a single $ee%end2
The second most effecti9e window of time for entering the
phase is ordinary #orning a$a%ening) This generally occurs
during light slumber following a full night8s sleep.
6nother effecti9e time to practice indirect techni'ues is
after awakening from a daytime nap. Once again< this type of
sleep will be light and short< which pro9ides the body needed rest
while allowing memory and intention to be kept intact through the
moment of awakening. 6gain< not e9eryone has the lu1ury of
taking daytime naps< but if such a chance arises< then it would be
9ery beneficial to take ad9antage of the opportunity.
4ightti#e a$a%enings are the least effecti9e times for
phase e1perimentation because the brain still re'uires a lot of
deep sleep at this time. 6wakening at night< the mind is 'uite
weak and hardly capable of any effort. 9en if some results are
obser9ed< awakening often ends with 'uickly falling back asleep.
This is not to say that normal practice of the phase cannot occur at
night@ it 5ust won8t be as effecti9e as at other times. The nighttime
option is best for those who lack an opportunity to use other
windows of time for practicing the phase.
7nderstand that we awaken at night e9ery .2 minutes<
which is why a minimum of four awakenings is almost
guaranteed when sleeping< e9en for 5ust si1 hours. ,hen the
practitioner knows about this and stri9es to sei>e those moments<
with time he will actually sei>e them and take ad9antage of them.
%O(S%IO.S AWA/E(I(G
)-
?onscious a$a%ening is waking up with a particular
thought in mind@ ideally< a thought about indirect techni'ues. &n
order to start using indirect techni'ues upon awakening< it is not
sufficient to ha9e a cursory knowledge of the techni'ues to be
used when waking. *ue to the peculiarities of the human mind
and its habits< it is not always easy when waking to recall any
particular moti9e or idea. The goal of conscious awakening is to
practice instant action without being idle after waking up.
Interesting Fact!
There e,ists a "elief that the
pheno#enon of out-of-"ody travel is
practically unattaina"le, and is
accessi"le only to an elect fe$ through
practices that re9uire secret %no$ledge)
5o$ever, the greatest difficulty $hen
trying to e,perience out-of-"ody travel
in a short period of ti#e lies only in
i##ediately re#e#"ering a"out the
techni9ues upon a$a%ening $ithout
#oving) This is all si#ple and
straightfor$ard) But it is precisely this
trifle that is the largest stu#"ling "loc%
$hen trying to e,perience such an
unco##on pheno#enon)
This is not difficult at all for appro1imately 25E of the
population. =owe9er< for the other three0'uarters of the
population< this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e9en seem
insurmountable. &f such thoughts arise< one should simply
understand that this cannot be so< and that persistent attempts and
training are the key solution.
The reasons why people are unable to remember
practicing the phase upon awakening are? not being in the habit of
immediately doing anything upon awakening< a desire to sleep
longer< a desire to go to the bathroom< being thirsty< a desire to
suddenly start sol9ing day0to0day problems< and so on.
)(
"onscious awakening with the intent of attempting an
indirect techni'ue should be a practitioner8s primary goal< which
should be pursued at e9ery cost. The speed at which the phase is
learned and e1perienced depends on this.
There are se9eral effecti9e tricks to learning conscious
awakening?
+ntention upon falling asleep/ This is the 9ery important to
successfully achie9ing conscious awakening. 6 9ery clear
scientific fact has been pro9en by somnologists :scientists who
study sleep;? upon awakening< people usually think about what
they had been thinking about before falling asleep. This
phenomenon is easy to obser9e if the sleeper is e1perience a
serious life problem@ they fall asleep with the problem and wake
with it. !o< in a case like this< if difficulties at the front of the
mind are replaced with a desire to practice the phase< this will
produce the desired effect. &t is not necessary to think solely about
conscious awakening while falling asleep. &t is sufficient to
simply affirm the intention clearly and distinctly< e9en state the
intention out loud. Practicing these types of conscious actions
while entering sleep will do much to promote the success of
indirect techni'ues upon awakening.
@eneral intent/ The more clearly a practitioner
concentrates on the importance and necessity of waking up and
immediately remembering to practice the techni'ues< the more
solid the intent will become< and the more likely the process will
fulfill its role and actually lead to results.
.ffir#ing desires/ !ometimes an internal intention is
simply not enough for some people< or they are unable to properly
affirm one by 9irtue of indi9idual characteristics. &n this case< an
affirmation of desires should be introduced at the physical le9el.
This could be in the form of a note with a description of a goal
placed ne1t to the bed< under one8s pillow< or hung on the wall. &t
could be a con9ersation with friends or family about the particular
desire< or by repeatedly 9ocali>ing the actions that need to be
performed upon awakening. &t could e9en be an entry in a diary<
blog< or te1ting on a mobile phone.
.naly1ing unsuccessful a$a%enings) 6naly>ing
unsuccessful attempts at conscious awakening is e1tremely
)3
important. ,hen remembering the failed attempt after se9eral
minutes< se9eral hours< or e9en later in the day< focus on it and
resol9e to succeed during the ne1t attempt. *eep e1ploration of
the failure is highly effecti9e and practical since the practitioner is
learning what works< what doesn8t work< and making healthy
resolutions toward success.
?reating #otivation/ The greater the desire to enter into
the phase to accomplish a goal there< the 'uicker successful
conscious awakening is achie9ed. Moti9ation is be created by a
great desire to do or e1perience something in the phase. &n
general< pre9ious 9isits to the phase are great moti9ation< but an
uninitiated person does not know it and will need something to
which they can relate. 4or some< this could be a childhood dream
of flying to Mars< for others it could be the opportunity to see a
lo9ed one who has passed away< for another it could be the
chance to obtain specific information< or influence the course of a
physical illness< and so forth.
6side from natural methods to achie9e conscious
awaking< there are 9arious de9ices and tools that facilitate a
measure of success. These will be co9ered in "hapter 5 in the
section describing non0autonomous ways of entering the phase.
The "est #o#ent for conscious a$a%ening is $hile e,iting
a drea#) This is the #ost effective and productive ti#e to atte#pt
separation or perfor#ing the techni9ues) 6t this moment<
physical awareness of the body is at a minimum. 6wareness at the
9ery end of a dream often occurs after nightmares< painful
e1periences in the dream< falling dreams # any dream that causes
a sudden awakening.
,ith time< one should de9elop a refle1 that enables one to
perform planned actions at the moment of awakening< but when
consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of
refle1 is highly beneficial to sei>ing the most fruitful of
opportunities to enter the phase.
*ue to 9arious psychological and physiological factors< it
is not possible for e9ery person to achie9e conscious awakening
after e9ery sleep cycle. Thus< there is no point in becoming upset
if conscious awakening does not occur e9ery time. 1periencing
only 2 to ) awakenings per day is normal@ this is sufficient
).
enough to attempt phase entrance 2 to 5 times per week when
practiced daily.
&t is not worth getting carried away with an e1cessi9e
number of attempts. *uring the !chool8s courses< it has been
noted that doing 12 conscious awakenings or more :some students
try 22 or e9en )2; o9er the course of one night and morning rarely
yields results. This is due to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal
that is desired so much that its reali>ation breaks the natural
rhythms of the body< one depri9es oneself of the intermediate<
transitional states that make the phase effecti9e. 6 practitioner
may also 'uickly become emotionally e1hausted from the large
number of attempts and be unable to push limits in the right
direction. The upside is that one will simply tire out. &f that starts
to happen< it is better to calm down and try to approach the matter
in a more rela1ed manner< e9enly and gradually.
AWA/E(I(G WIT'O.T )O3I(G
6longside remembering the phase immediately upon
waking< another important re'uirement is awakening without
mo9ing< which is difficult since many people wake up and mo9e.
7pon awakening< scratching< stretching< opening the eyes< and
listening to real sounds should be a9oided. 6ny real mo9ement or
perception will 9ery 'uickly disintegrate the intermediate state
and introduce reality< the acti9ation of the mind and its
connection to the sensory organs.
6t first< awakening without mo9ing seems difficult or
e9en impossible. =owe9er< it has been pro9en that this is
remedied for through acti9e attempts and the desire to achie9e set
goals. People often claim that they cannot awaken without
mo9ing< that it8s an impossible e1perience. =owe9er< after se9eral
attempts< it will happen< and it will occur more and more
fre'uently with practice.
Thus< if there is difficulty in awakening without
mo9ement< do not despair< 5ust keep trying. !ooner or later< the
body will yield to the practice< and e9erything will happen
smoothly.
+2
6wakening without mo9ing is 9ery important because< for
the ma5ority of people< e1periments with the phase are not
possible e1cept in the first waking moments where waking
without mo9ing sets the stage for successful indirect techni'ue
cycles. Often< a practitioner will make 12 unsuccessful attempts
and mo9e while awakening. Once the practitioner learns to
consistently wake calmly and gradually< success 'uickly follows.
'o9ever: if a" a9ake"i"# i$ co"$ciou$: but 9ith
7ove7e"t: that doe$ "ot 7ea" that the practitio"er ca""ot
i77ediately 7ake a" atte7pt to fall i"to the pha$e; Such
atte7pt$: althou#h they 9ill be about < ti7e$ le$$ effective
tha" u$ual: $hould "everthele$$ be 7ade A"y opportu"ity to
practice 9hile 9aki"# $hould "ot be 9a$ted; It 7u$t o"ly be
kept i" 7i"d that o"e 7u$t fir$t "eutrali=e the effect$ of the
7ove7e"t i" order to o"ce a#ai" fall i"to a" i"ter7ediate
$tate; I" the ca$e of 7ove7e"t: it i$ e>tre7ely helpful to be#i"
practice 9ith forced falli"# a$leep; ,i$te"i"# i" al$o 9ork$
9ell: a$ doe$ ob$ervi"# i7a#e$ a"d pha"to7 9i##li"#: each
perfor7ed pa$$ively for <-!< $eco"d$: i"$tead of the $ta"dard
duratio" of ? to < $eco"d$; After perfor7i"# the$e: cycli"#
7ay be#i";
6wakening without mo9ement< despite all its importance<
is not a goal in and of itself< and also not worth suffering o9er.
,hen awakening< if there is great discomfort< something itches< a
need to swallow arises< or any manner of natural refle1< it is better
to deal with it and then act according to practices recommended
when mo9ement upon awakening happens.
/ot all mo9ements upon awakening are real and< if only
for this reason alone< when mo9ement occurs< indirect techni'ues
should follow.

Interesting Fact!
'p to 2< of sensations and
actions that happen upon a$a%ening are
not real as they see#, "ut are phanto#)

4alse sensations occur in widely di9erse ways. People
often do not understand what is going on with them without
+1
ha9ing e1perienced the phase. 4or e1ample< a person may think
they are scratching their ear with their physical hand when they
are really using a phantom hand. 6 person may hear pseudo0
sounds in the room< on the street< or at the neighbor8s without
noting anything unusual. Or< a person may look around the room
without knowing that their eyes are actually closed. &f a
practitioner recogni>es such moments for what they are< they may
immediately try to separate from the body.
%*%,ES OF I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
+2
Thus far< indirect techni'ues used for phase entrance and
techni'ues for separation in the phase ha9e been co9ered.
"onscious awakening and the best times to practice it ha9e also
been e1amined. /ow< a specific algorithm of action for indirect
techni'ues will be presented. 4ollowing this algorithm promises
'uick and practical results.
!; Te$ti"# Separatio" Tech"i2ue$ 9ithi" < Seco"d$
Dike the pre9ious obser9ation of separation techni'ues< a
third of successful attempts with indirect techni'ues yield
immediate success upon the attempt of a separation techni'ue due
to the fact that the first seconds after waking up are the most
useful for entering the phase. The less time that has elapsed after
awakening< the better. "on9ersely< if one lies down e1pecting
something to happen< chances 'uickly dissipate.
Thus< upon awakening< preferably without first mo9ing< a
practitioner should immediately try 9arious separation techni'ues<
like rolling out< getting up< or le9itation. &f a techni'ue suddenly
started to yield results for appro1imately for 5 seconds< then
separation from the body should be attempted. !ometimes inertia<
difficulty< or a barrier will arise during a separation attempt. /o
attention should be gi9en to these problems. &nstead< resol9e to
separate 0 decidedly and aggressi9ely climb out of the body.
Heep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon
awakening is a skill of the utmost importance@ one that is worth
honing from the 9ery beginning< ne9er forgotten.
1; The %ycle of I"direct Tech"i2ue$ to .$e if O"e i$
."able to Separate
&f separation does not occur after se9eral seconds< it most
likely means that separation will not occur< regardless of elapsed
time in effort. This is where the practitioner must resort to other
techni'ues.
The practitioner should already ha9e chosen a minimum
of three primary or secondary techni'ues that suit a practical
repertoire. =ere is where the techni'ues are put into action.
+)
4ota Bene2 +n order to give a specific e,a#ple, $e $ill
e,a#ine the use of three specific techni9ues, $hich should "e
replaced $ith a tested and chosen set of techni9ues) The
following operational techni'ues ha9e been used as e1amples?
obser9ing images :a;< phantom wiggling :b;< and listening in :c;.
6fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating< the
practitioner immediately starts obser9ing the 9oid behind the
eyes. &f images begin to appear within ) to 5 seconds< obser9ation
should continue without scrutini>ing the images in detail< or the
image will e9aporate. 6s a result of this action< the image will
'uickly become more and more realistic and colorful< engulfing
the practitioner. &f e9erything comes together correctly< a sudden
translocation into the picture will occur< or< when the picture
becomes 9ery realistic< attempt to separate from the body. &f
nothing happens after ) to 5 seconds< then the practitioner should
transition to the techni'ue of phantom wiggling.
4or ) to 5 seconds< the practitioner 'uickly searches the
entire body for a part that can be wiggled. Or< the entire period of
time is spent in an attempt to wiggle a specific body part? a finger<
hand< or leg. &f the desired effect occurs< then the practitioner
should continue with the techni'ue and achie9e the ma1imum
possible range of mo9ement. *uring this process< a number of
things can happen< including spontaneous separation< a successful
separation attempt< free mo9ement of the wiggled part< or the
presence of sound or 9ibrations. 6ll of these e9ents are of great
ad9antage. &f nothing wiggles o9er the course of ) to 5 seconds<
then the practitioner should mo9e on to listening in.
The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. &f
the sound is there< listen and try to amplify it. 6s a result< the
noise may grow into a roar and spontaneous separation will occur<
separating through the use of a techni'ue will be possible< or
9ibrations will occur. &f no noise occurs o9er the course of ) to 5
seconds< then the entire cycle should be repeated.
&t is beneficial to e1amine the reason behind the use of a
set of three indirect techni'ues. This is moti9ated by the fact that
the body often reacts to techni'ues in 9ery peculiar ways. ,ith
one person< a techni'ue may work one day and not work on
another day< which is why if only one techni'ue is used< e9en a
++
9ery good techni'ue that works often< a practitioner can miss out
on a lot of different e1perience through the lack of 9ariety in
practice. Thus< a practical repertoire should consist of se9eral
techni'ues.
Interesting Fact!
So#eti#es, the first techni9ue
that $or%s for a practitioner never
results in a repeat of phase entrance
again, although other techni9ues that
$ere not i##ediately effective at the
novice stages of practice later "egin to
$or% regularly and successfully)
?; Repeati"# the %ycle of I"direct Tech"i2ue$
&f the first cycle of ) techni'ues does not yield any clear
results< this does not mean that all is lost. 9en if the techni'ues
do not work< they still draw the practitioner closer to the phase
state and it is simply necessary to continue using the techni'ues
by again obser9ing pictures< phantom wiggling< and listening in #
and repeating this process at least three times.
=a9ing performed one cycle of techni'ues< one can easily
go on to doing a second cycle< a third one< a fourth one< and so
on. &t is 'uite probable that during one of these cycles< a techni'ue
will suddenly pro9e itself< e9en though it had not been working at
all 5ust a few seconds beforehand.
6 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of +
cycles. The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically
difficult to do something that has shown itself not to work< and
one may gi9e up taking further action< e9en though one could be
at the cusp of falling into the phase. Heep trying< and then try
again< and againM There ha9e been cases where it took twenty
cycles to produce results. 6 monumental effort< yes< but one
worth the outcome.
@; Falli"# A$leep 9ith the Po$$ibility of Tryi"# A#ai";
+5
&f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after
performing cycles and attempts to separate< or e9en if e9erything
worked out< it is still better to go back to sleep to facilitate
subse'uent attempts. 6gain< it is 9ery important to go to sleep
with a clearly defined intention of actually performing the cycles
upon awakening. !uch intention 9astly increases the probability
that the ne1t attempt will occur soon. That is< one should not fall
asleep with an empty head and the desire to simply get a good
night8s sleep. &f using the deferred method< then clear intention is
mandatory< as se9eral attempts are possible o9er the course of a
sleep cycle.
9en if only a few attempts are made accompanied by
decided and concentrated effort< then the four steps described in
the algorithm will undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.
&n order to more effecti9ely use the system of indirect
cycles< it is necessary to discuss what to do if one techni'ue
works and progress ceases during the cycle and phase entry does
not occur.
4irst< understand that if a techni'ue has begun to work<
only lack of e1perience and skill will pre9ent the phase.
!econd< barriers are o9ercome by temporarily switching to
other techni'ues. Det us suppose that noise arising when listening
in grows louder and louder and then peaks in 9olume. &t would
surely be beneficial to switch to forced falling asleep or obser9ing
images for se9eral seconds< and then return to listening in. The
sound may then become much louder and pro9ide an opportunity
to proceed with the techni'ue. !ometimes< it makes sense to break
off se9eral times into 9arious techni'ues and then return to the
primary techni'ue that yielded some results.
+-
&t is often possible to simultaneously perform two or e9en
three techni'ues and e1perience no negati9e effect to results. &t is
also normal and natural to skip around from techni'ue to
techni'ue< de9iating from a specific plan of action. 4or e1ample<
sounds often arise during phantom wiggling. &n this case< a
practitioner may 5ust simply switch o9er to listening in. Other oft0
encountered results pairings are? images from sound< sound from
rotation< sound from straining the brain< a strain on the brain from
listening in< 9ibrations from rotation< 9ibrations from phantom
wiggling< and so forth.
8uring initial atte#pts at using cycles of indirect
techni9ues, the pro"le# of confusion during a critical #o#ent
#ay arise, $hen a novice practitioner suddenly forgets e,actly
$hat to do and ho$ to do it) This is nor#al, and the solution is to
i##ediately do $hatever co#es to #ind) Results can "e achieved
in this #anner) :hen a practitioner is #ore rela,ed a"out the
practice, such pro"le#s $ill no longer occur)
'I(TS FRO) T'E )I(
Faried cycles of indirect techni'ues is an almost
mandatory precondition for getting the best result. There are some
+(
e1ceptions. !ometimes< through indirect indicators< a practitioner
may be inclined to begin with certain techni'ues< regardless of
what had been planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and
the ability to use such cues plays an e1tremely important role in
the use of indirect techni'ues because they enable a practitioner to
substantially increase the effecti9eness of practice.
'i"t (o; !8 I7a#e$
&f the practitioner becomes aware upon awakening that
some images< pictures< or remnants from dreams are before him<
then he should immediately proceed to the techni'ue of obser9ing
images< with all of the results that arise from it. &f this does not
lead to anything< then cycling with a set of techni'ues should
begin.
'i"t (o; 18 (oi$e$
&f the practitioner reali>es upon awakening that he hears
an internal noise< roaring< ringing< whistling< and so forth< then he
should immediately begin from the techni'ue of listening in. &f
this has no effect< then cycles of indirect techni'ues ought to
commence.

'i"t (o; ?8 3ibratio"$
&f a practitioner feels 9ibrations throughout the body while
awakening< they should be amplified through the use of straining
the brain or straining the body without using muscles. ,hen the
9ibrations reach their peak< the practitioner can try to separate. &f
nothing happens after se9eral attempts< indirect techni'ue cycles
should start.

'i"t (o; @8 (u7b"e$$
&f a practitioner wakes to numbness in a body part<
phantom wiggling of that part should be attempted. &f no result is
achie9ed after se9eral attempts< cycling should be tried. Of
course< it is better to refrain from techni'ues if the numbness is
9ery intense and causes substantial discomfort.
AGGRESSIO( A( PASSI3IT*
+3
*uring the practice of indirect techni'ues< including
techni'ue cycles< unsuccessful attempts may result in falling
asleep or becoming completely awake. These results indicate a
deficiency or e1cess of aggression.
&f a practitioner usually falls asleep while attempting to
enter the phase< then more aggressi9e action is needed while
performing indirect techni'ues. &f< on the other hand< most
attempts end in a full and alert awakening< then aggression should
be curbed and techni'ues should be conducted more slowly and in
a more rela1ed manner. %alance between passi9ity and aggression
is imperati9e@ the phase state is easily attained by those
practitioners who find a stable medium between passi9ity and
aggression.
The issue of aggression re'uires a closer e1amination.
Auite often, atte#pts at indirect techni9ues are #ade leisurely,
$ithout desire or real effort, to &chec% the# off the list*) Results
#ore easily reali1ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive
desire to enter the phase) More often than not, practitioners lac%
aggressive desire, instead of having too #uch of it) Thus, each
effort re9uires a distinct $ant to succeed)
STRATEG* FOR A%TIO(
!ome mistakenly belie9e that indirect techni'ues will
produce 'uick< easy results< like a pill. *espite the fact that the
techni'ues described in this guidebook are the best means to
entering the phase< strong effort still needs to be e1erted. This is
not important for some< as e9erything comes 'uite easily to them<
but for others this is of great importance.
&ndirect techni'ues will definitely work if practiced
consistently and as described. &t has already been noted that in the
ma5ority of cases< making se9eral concentrated attempts upon
awakening without mo9ement is sufficient enough to produce
results. &t may take a lot of time and effort to achie9e phase
entrance< so practitioners who set goals and work diligently will
be presented with a crown of success.
+.
6ttempts are important in large measure not only for the
final result< but also for the process itself. *uring practice< the
practitioner independently learns and sol9es issues that may not
ha9e been understood in the guidebook. Other times< the
practitioner will encounter situations that ha9e ne9er been
described at all. &t8s impossible to prepare a student for e9ery
possible scenario< so as a practitioner mo9es deeper into practice<
a uni'ue< indi9idual perspecti9e and portfolio of e1periences
de9elops< which will certainly pro9e useful in the future. 7ntil
then< diligent practice of the information presented in this book
will ready a practitioner for that personal frontier.
6ctions in practice re'uire strict attention. !tudy the
techni'ues and selects those that work best. !et the goal of
consistent< conscious waking without mo9ement. Make an
ob5ecti9e of performing cycles of indirect techni'ues while
waking up< day in and day out. :ith such a clear course of
action, the practitioner should never defocus his attention or
dissipate his energy on other related actions, li%e, for e,a#ple,
on direct techni9ues for entering the phase) &f the indirect
techni'ues do not work in the course of se9eral days< continue
trying. The latest results occur in a matter of weeks< not months or
years< like some sources maintain. $oals are meant to be
stubbornly pursued< step0by0step< firmly< and diligently.
&f no results occur after 12 to 22 days< it is better to cease
practice for a week and take a rest< and then return with a fresh
resol9e to master the practice. &nterestingly enough< it is e1actly
during such a break that spontaneous entrances into the phase
through the most di9erse methods occur.
&f success is still elusi9e e9en after 1 to 2 months of trying<
then a thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to
root out any ob9ious mistakes or deficiencies. &f o9ercoming them
pro9es difficult or impossible< switching o9er to direct techni'ues
is not recommended since they pro9e much more difficult than
indirect techni'ues. &nstead< techni'ues for entering the phase
through conscious dreaming should be practiced.
&t is also not worth skipping o9er problematic areas and
trying to make up for mistakes by e1pending e9en more effort.
4or e1ample< ignoring the precondition of awakening without
52
mo9ing will pro9e fruitless. %ypassing this re'uirement works for
9ery few people. 4acing e9ery problem head0on and working hard
to break through will be richly rewarded with an unforgettable<
treasured e1periences. Heep tryingM
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES
WIT' I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
&nternal certainty that nothing will happen instead of belie9ing
in positi9e results.
!topping the performance of techni'ues after an unsuccessful
cycle when a minimum of four cycles should be practiced.
"onstantly awakening to mo9ement instead of remaining still.
Performing direct techni'ues in the e9ening. Total
concentration on indirect techni'ues is re'uired from the morning
on if a practitioner8s goal is access to the phase.
Performing indirect techni'ues for an e1tremely long period
of time :2 minutes or more;. This is a complete waste of time in
most cases.
!witching from techni'ues that ha9e begun to work when
practice should be followed through to the end.
Passi9ely performing techni'ues instead of being determined
and aggressi9e.
Performing each techni'ue separately for too long a period of
time< e9en if the techni'ue does not work< instead of switching to
another techni'ue within se9eral seconds.
1cessi9e thinking and analysis while performing indirect
techni'ues< which re'uire mental tran'uility and inner stillness.
!topping and concentrating on unusual sensations when they
arise 9ersus continuing the techni'ue that brought them about in
the first place.
1tremely long anticipation upon awakening instead of
immediately performing techni'ues.
Premature attempts at separating< instead of performing phase
creation techni'ues through to the end of progress.
=olding the breath when unusual sensations appear. %e calm
instead.
51
Opening the eyes when the only recommended mo9ement is
breathing or mo9ing the eyes behind closed lids.
%eing agitated instead of rela1ed.
"easing attempts to separate e9en when partial success is met.
!training the physical muscles while performing the
techni'ues 9ersus remaining physically motionless.
/ot practicing after an alert awakening< when techni'ues are
best applied 0 especially in the e9ent of waking without
mo9ement.
Merely imagining the techni'ues instead of really
understanding them and performing them< if< of course< one is not
performing rotation or other imagined techni'ues.
!imply wiggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi1ed
determination to increase the range of mo9ement
4alling right asleep during forced falling asleep< instead of
ha9ing the firm intention of continuing efforts within only 5 to 12
seconds.
!crutini>ing the details of images when using the techni'ue of
obser9ing images@ the whole image should be obser9ed
panoramically lest it disappear.
&ntentionally trying to force pictures when obser9ing images<
instead of looking for what is naturally presented.
!imply hearing noise when employing the techni'ue of
listening in< instead of attenti9ely trying to pay attention< catch
something< and listen in.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER 1
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hy are indirect techni'ues the easiestJ
2. ,hy will one techni'ue work for some people and not for
othersJ
). =ow many attempts are necessary in order to enter the
phaseJ
+. ,hen obser9ing images< should a picture be con5uredJ
52
5. =ow is phantom wiggling different from imagined
mo9ementJ
-. ,here does sound come from while listening inJ
(. =ow is forced listening in different from normal listening
inJ
3. ,hen employing the techni'ue of rotation< should one try
to rotate or simply imagine the rotationJ
.. ,hat is physically strained when using the techni'ue of
straining the brainJ
12. =ow is straining the brain different from straining the
body without using musclesJ
11. !hould a practitioner fall asleep when using the forced
falling asleep techni'ueJ
12. 6ccording to statistics from classes held at the !chool of
Out0of0%ody Tra9el< which indirect techni'ues are the most
effecti9eJ
1). ,hy should one practice all of the primary techni'ues in a
rela1ed stateJ
1+. ,hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one0third of the
time while using indirect techni'uesJ
15. &s le9itation the most popular separation techni'ueJ
1-. ,hat is the essential difference between indirect
techni'ues and separation techni'uesJ
1(. =ow does the separation techni'ue of rolling out differ
from the indirect techni'ue of rotationJ
13. &s it necessary to imagine anything while trying to
separateJ
1.. ,hen is the best time to use indirect techni'uesJ
22. "an techni'ues that are traditionally used upon awakening
be attempted during the dayJ =ow effecti9e are these
techni'ues during the dayJ
21. &s becoming consciousness while dreaming the same as
conscious awakeningJ
22. ,hen employing indirect techni'ues< does an inability to
awaken without mo9ing ha9e an effect on oneCs practiceJ
2). ,hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling
indirect techni'uesJ
5)
2+. ,hat first step must be taken while cycling through
indirect techni'uesJ
25. =ow many different techni'ues should a cycle consist ofJ
2-. ,hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be
practicedJ
2(. &f a lot of time has passed after awakening< is this good or
bad for cycles of indirect techni'uesJ
23. ,hat must be done if a techni'ue gets stuck at an
unsatisfactory le9el of resultsJ
2.. &f the cycles do not work< what should be doneJ
)2. ,hat are hints from the mindJ
)1. &n what cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi9e effort
when performing indirect techni'uesJ
Ta$k$
1. Try all of the primary indirect techni'ues while in a
rela1ed state and single out ) to 5 techni'ues that seem to
work. Repeat such training another couple of times on other
days.
2. Try all of the separation techni'ues in a rela1ed state.
). 6chie9e one conscious awakening followed by cycles of
indirect techni'ues.
+. 6chie9e one conscious awakening without any physical
mo9ement and attempt an indirect techni'ue.
5. 7pon awakening without mo9ing< perform a full cycle of
indirect techni'ues< and repeat this e1ercise until phase
entrance is achie9ed.
5+
%hapter ? & irect Tech"i2ue$
T'E %O(%EPT OF IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
8irect techni9ues for entering into an out-of-"ody
e,perience are used $ithout the prere9uisite of sleepB "y
perfor#ing specific actions $hile lying do$n $ith the eyes
closed) The ad9antage of direct techni'ues is that< in theory< they
can be performed at any moment. =owe9er< a large drawback
e1ists in the length of time it takes to master the techni'ues. Only
52E of practitioners achie9e success after making daily attempts
o9er a period of ) to - weeks. 4or some< an entire year may pass
before results are reali>ed. The difficulty in achie9ing results with
direct techni'ues is not a problem of inaccessibility< but the
natural psychological characteristics of the indi9idual. /ot
e9eryone is able to clearly understand the specific nuances
in9ol9ed< which is why some will continually make mistakes.
Many practitioners stri9e to master direct techni'ues right
away because they appear to be the most con9enient<
straightforward< and concrete techni'ues. =owe9er< it is a gra9e
mistake to begin attempting and mastering phase entrance from
this le9el. &n .2E of cases where no9ices begin their training with
direct techni'ues< failure is guaranteed. Moreo9er< a 9ast amount
of time< effort< and emotion will be wasted. 6s a result< complete
disillusionment with the entire sub5ect of phase e1periences is
possible.
8irect techni9ues should only "e practiced after #astery
of the easiest indirect techni9ues or ho$ to "eco#e conscious
$hen drea#ing) +n any case, difficulties $ill not $ear one do$n
after$ards, as it $ill "e e,ceedingly clear fro# one-s o$n
e,perience that the phase is not a fig#ent of the i#agination)
.lso, an advanced %no$ledge of indirect techni9ues $ill #a%e it
considera"ly easier to achieve direct entry into the phase)
55
Nuality of the phase e1perience is not dependent upon the
chosen entrance techni'ue. *irect techni'ues do not necessarily
pro9ide a deeper< more lasting phase o9er indirect techni'ues.
*irect techni'ues are better suited for some practitioners
and not others< but this ban only be said for a minority of the
practicing population. Meanwhile< indirect techni'ues are
accessible to absolutely e9eryone all of the time.
&f a practitioner has decides to begin practice with direct
techni'ues or has gained the necessary e1perience with indirect
techni'ues< the underlying principles of the techni'ues must still
be learned. ,ithout these< nothing will occur< e1cept
coincidentally and in rare cases. The key to the successful use of
direct techni'ues rests in achie9ing a free0floating state of
consciousness. =owe9er< we will first e1amine a large 9ariety of
9ery useful aspects and factors that make direct entry into the
phase much easier.
4irst< we will e1amine when it is best to perform the
techni'ues and how intensi9ely to e1ercise their practice. Then<
we will e1amine the 9ery important factor of body position< and
the no less crucial issue of how long the techni'ues should be
performed. Then< we will briefly in9estigate the issue of
rela1ation< and then we will immediately mo9e on to the actual
direct techni'ues. Only after co9ering all of the abo9e are we able
to del9e into the issue of what a free0floating state of
consciousness is and how to achie9e it.
T'E BEST TI)E TO PRA%TI%E
The issue of time is not important with indirect techni'ues
since the ma5or prere'uisite is that they are performed
immediately after awakening occurs. &n the case of direct
techni'ues< the issue of timing is much more critical.
/aturally< the best method for finding the right time to
perform direct techni'ues is the same as indirect techni'ues # the
deferred #ethod. =owe9er< there are some serious differences
here. 4irst of all< one may interrupt one8s sleep at practically
anytime of the night or early morning. !econd< after ha9ing
5-
woken up :5015 min.;< one should not fall back asleep< but should
immediately proceed to the techni'ues.
*irect techni'ues are many times more effecti9e with the
deferred method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that
with the deferred method< the mind does not ha9e time to become
122E alert< and it is easy to fall into the altered state of
consciousness that will allow results.
,hen it comes to specific steps< one should awaken in the
middle of the night either on oneCs own or with the help of an
alarm clock. Then< one should get up and do something for ) to
12 minutes< and then lie down again in bed and perform the
techni'ues. &f it is probable that the practitioner will wake up in
too alert a state< and thus not e9en be sleepy< then the inter9al
between awakening and performing the direct techni'ue should
be shortened< and fewer things should be done during that period
of time. &t should be noted that with this setup< a free0floating
state of mind plays a far lesser role that with other procedures.
The second most effecti9e window of time is "efore
falling asleep at night< when the practitioner goes to bed. *uring
this period of time< the brain needs to shut down the body and
mind in order to renew its strength< which has been e1pended
o9er the course of the day. This natural process can be taken
ad9antage of by introducing certain ad5ustments to it.
6ttempts at performing direct techni'ues during the day
are less effecti9e. =owe9er< if fatigue has already had a chance to
build up by this time< this can be taken ad9antage of because the
body will try to fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those
who are accustomed to napping during the day.
$enerally< other windows of time produce a substantially
worse result< which is why one should start with performing
direct techni'ues in the middle of the night< or before a nightCs
sleep. Only after such techni'ues ha9e been mastered will it be
possible to e1periment with daytime attempts.
I(TE(SIT* OF ATTE)PTS
The degree of enthusiasm that is de9oted to any pursuit is
directly related to successfully reaching a goal. =owe9er< it is
5(
9ery important to know when to ease up< especially with the
delicate matter of phase entry. One attempt per day using a direct
techni'ue is sufficient. &f more attempts are made< the 'uality of
each attempt will suffer considerably.
Interesting Fact!
Many approach direct techni9ues
as if digging a ditch/ the #ore - the
faster and the "etter) The result/ do1ens
of atte#pts that yield no fruit)

6 lot of practitioners belie9e that do>ens of attempts o9er
the course of a day will yield the phase. This is not the path to
success and will 'uickly lead to disillusionment with the practice.
9en if after a week or a month no results are seen< direct
techni'ues should be attempted only once daily. Persistent<
analytical< and sensible< stubborn resol9e to practice properly will
produce the desired effect.
.RATIO( OF A( ATTE)PT
&t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct
techni'ue by lying in bed and resol9ing neither to sleep nor get up
until the phase occurs. !uch coarseness in handling delicate
nature of the mind will produce nothing besides rapid emotional
e1haustion.
Rigid timeframes apply while performing direct
techni'ues before a sleep or in the middle of the night. *irect
techni'ues attempts should only last 12 to 22 minutes. Donger
durations inhibit sleepiness because the mind will concentrate too
long on the techni'ues< and the desire to fall asleep will dissipate<
resulting in insomnia that often lasts se9eral hours. O9erdone
efforts negati9ely affect natural enthusiasm due lost sleep and
being tired the following day< which is compounded by the reality
of a growing number of failed attempts.
&f direct techni'ues produce no effect o9er the course of
12 to 22 minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night< then it
is better to go to sleep with the thought that e9erything will work
53
out another time. This is the positi9e outlook a practitioner ought
to always maintain.
BO* POSITIO(
,ith indirect techni'ues body position isn8t important
since conscious awakening regardless of body position is the goal.
=owe9er< the position of the body is crucial while practicing
direct techni'ues.
There is not an e1act body position that each practitioner
should assume since< once again< indi9idual characteristics and
instincts differ widely. There are specific rules that allow one to
select the right position< based on indirect indicators.
Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse
# lying on the back without a pillow< legs and arms straightened.
This notion has probably been borrowed from other practices
claiming that it helps achie9e an altered state of mind. =owe9er<
this position seriously impairs the efforts of the ma5ority of
practitioners. The corpse pose should only be used when it is
probable that a practitioner will 'uickly fall asleep while
performing techni'ues in this pose< e9en though it generally
pre9ents sleep.
&f a practitioner e1periences difficulty falling asleep and is
constantly awake while performing direct techni'ues< then the
most comfortable position for the indi9idual should be used.
+f sleep co#es 9uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural
position should "e ta%en) +f a practitioner e,periences fe$er gaps
in consciousness $hen the techni9ues are perfor#ed and has a
harder ti#e falling asleep, a #ore co#forta"le a position should
"e used) *epending on the situation< there are many possible
positions? lying down on the back< on the stomach< on the side< or
e9en in a half0reclined position. &t is possible that a practitioner
will ha9e to change positions from one attempt to another<
introducing ad5ustments related to a free0floating state of mind.
RE,A0ATIO(
5.
%y nature< one should clearly understand that direct
techni'ues are in and of themsel9es rela1ation methods< inasmuch
as no phase can occur without one being rela1ed. 6ccordingly<
one can go immediately into the phase without any prior
rela1ation.
!ince the most effecti9e window of time for using direct
techni'ues occurs before sleep and at night< and lasts only 12 to
22 minutes in any case< additional time should not be wasted on
trying to rela1< nor should time for rela1ation be subtracted from
the re'uisite 12 to 22 minutes.
"orrect and 'uality rela1ation is a difficult pursuit and
many go about it indi9idually< producing an opposition to natural
rela1ation. 4or e1ample< many endea9or to rela1 their bodies to
such a degree that in the end the mind is as acti9e as it would be
while trying to sol9e a difficult mathematical e'uation. &n this
type of situation< entering the phase is impossible.
The body automatically rela1es when the mind is rela1ed.
The body< in turn< will ne9er rela1 if the mind is acti9e.
Therefore< it is better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the
nuances of rela1ation and sa9e their energies for more elementary
matters.
&nstead of forcing a technical rela1ation< a practitioner
should simply lie down for se9eral minutes and this will pro9ide
the best rela1ation. Dying down acti9ates natural rela1ation
processes@ the most powerful kind.
"omplete< peaceful rela1ation may only be coerced by
those with speciali>ed< in0depth e1perience. $enerally< these are
people who ha9e spent a great amount of time and effort
mastering trance and meditati9e states. Rela1ation in these cases
should take no more than 1 to ) minutes and no longer as because
when a practitioner is e1pert at rela1ation it is sufficient to 5ust
think about it< and it occurs.
6ll 'uality rela1ation techni'ues may well ser9e as direct
techni'ues< if a free0floating state of mind occurs while they are
e1ercised. 6fter gaining the necessary e1perience with trance and
meditation< a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to
mastering the phase.
-2
3ARIATIO(S OF .SI(G
IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
Techni'ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are
e1actly the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only
difference is in the method of implementation. The techni'ues are
described in detail in "hapter 2. =owe9er< since direct techni'ues
mostly re'uire passi9ity< not all techni'ues work e'ually well for
both direct and indirect entries into the phase. 4or e1ample< acti9e
techni'ues like straining the brain cannot be used to gain a
smooth entrance into the phase.
*irect techni'ues differ from indirect techni'ues in their
implementation because of the slow< halting production of results
that occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end
of it. &f upon awakening something happens to work< then this can
practically always lead to entrance into the phase. 4or e1ample<
the same phantom wiggling before sleep can begin 'uickly
enough< but range of mo9ement will not be easy to increase< and
the entire implementation of the techni'ue will rely on protracted<
rhythmic mo9ement. Results take much longer? ten minutes
instead of ten seconds. These differences also apply to e9ery
techni'ue described in this guidebook.
Dike the practice of indirect techni'ues< to begin the
practice of direct techni'ues< a practitioner should choose ) or +
of the most suitable techni'ues from those that pro9e most
effecti9e to the indi9idual. &n order to assist the practitioner< a
table has been pro9ided< detailing the documented effecti9eness
of the direct techni'ues?
-1
The )o$t Effective irect Tech"i2ue$ at Se7i"ar$ of the School
of Out-of-Body Travel
Phantom ,iggling 15E
Rotation 15E
Distening in 15E
Fibrations :occurring amid the use of other
techni'ues;
15E
Obser9ing &mages 12E
Mi1ture of Techni'ues 12E
!imple separation :usually mi1ed in with other
techni'ues;
12E
Other Techni'ues 12E

The primary difference in working with direct techni'ues
is the time that it takes to e1ercise each. &f testing a specific
indirect techni'ue takes only ) to 5 seconds< then in this case
se9eral minutes will be spent. *uration 9aries depending on
certain factors.
There are three primary ways of performing the
techni'ues? classical< se'uencing< and cycling 0 similar to the
cycling used with indirect techni'ues. To understand which
9ariant should be used< consider the following table?
3ariatio"$ of .$i"# the
Tech"i2ue$
Whe" to .$e It
?lassical Cpassive0 variation/
One attempt of 1 techni'ue.
The techni'ue may be alternated
after each attempt.
0 when learning direct
techni'ues@
0 when a practitioner generally
sleeps poorly@
0 if attempts lead to waking up@
0 if attempts with other
9ariations occur without lapses in
consciousness@
0 if the body and consciousness
are in a rela1ed state@
Se9uencing C#iddle0/
One attempt with 2 to )
techni'ues for 1 to 5 minutes.
Techni'ues are alternated
infre'uently. 6ggression
fluctuates with the length of time
that the techni'ues are
performed.
0 used if falling asleep occurs
while using the classical 9ariation<
or if cycling results in becoming
wide awake@
0 when a practitioner generally
falls asleep 'uickly@
?ycling Cactive0/
6lgorithm of cycling )
techni'ues like with indirect
entry to the phase< but
performing each techni'ue for 12
seconds to 1 minute< and not ) to
5 seconds.
0 if the classical and se'uencing
9ariations put one asleep@
0 when one generally falls asleep
9ery 'uickly@
0 can also be employed when
e1hausted or sleep depri9ed@

-2
6 practitioner should always begin with the classical
9ariation< i.e. using one techni'ue o9er an entire attempt. *ue to
the unusual nature of the efforts in9ol9ed< a beginner8s
enthusiasm may sustain a completely alert state. Dater< howe9er<
strong< prolonged lapses of consciousness into sleep may occur.
=ere< it may be necessary to increase the le9el of acti9ity by
transitioning to the se'uencing 9ariation.
!e'uencing is the primary 9ariation used for direct
techni'ues because of its elasticity in application. &t can be
passi9e if o9er the course of 15 minutes when a practitioner
alternates two techni'ues for fi9e minutes. &t may also be
aggressi9e if used se'uencing three techni'ues for one minute.
9erything between these two e1tremes allows proper practice of
the techni'ues and selection of the best 9ariation to achie9e a
free0floating state of mind.
&f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e9en with the
acti9e form of se'uencing< then one should start cycling through
indirect techni'ues< but performing each techni'ue from 12
seconds to 1 minute.
6s long work with the techni'ues is implied< one should
not torment oneself if one does not want to do something<
otherwise one may 'uickly tire out. 9erything should be a
pleasure to do and not cause any e1cessi9e emotional tension.
T'E FREE-F,OATI(G STATE OF )I(
There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry
techni'ues offered in literature< stories< on the &nternet< and at
seminars. !ometimes< one description fundamentally differs from
another. &n the ma5ority of cases< howe9er< common threads e1ist
that unite almost e9ery description of a particular techni'ue? short
lapses in consciousness< memory gaps< and drifting in and out of
sleep< all of which are hallmarks of the free0floating state of mind.
6fter any of these phenomena occur< all manner of unusual pre0
phase or phase sensations arise.
Dapses in consciousness may last for seconds< se9eral
minutes< or more than an hour. They may range from a simple
loss of consciousness to entrance into a full0fledged dream. They
-)
may be singular and rare< or may occur se9eral times o9er the
course of a minute. ,hate9er a lapse entails< the mind attains a
mode of operating that is ideal for phase e1perimentation<
pro9ided the practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and
'uickly return to a conscious< waking state.
/ot e9ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The
lapse must ha9e sufficient depth to be effecti9e. Thus< with e9ery
unsuccessful lapse< another deeper lapse should be incurred.
The primary practical drawback of the free0floating state
of mind is the possibility of falling completely asleep during
lapses instead of only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni'ues
are definitely necessary to ensure the desired result. !uch
techni'ues more or less fulfill an au1iliary function< and thus one
need not be strict about them.
I"tere$ti"# FactA
+t does not #atter $hich direct
techni9ue is usedB as long as it leads to
lapses in consciousness, success is
possi"le)
,hen performing the 9ariations of the techni'ues< a
practitioner can begin to 9acillate between full alertness and
complete asleep< coming to< and then nodding off again.
-+
To a9oid falling asleep re'uires a strong desire to return to
wakefulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol9e on the part
of the practitioner< e9en if< while performing a direct techni'ue<
drifting in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly
assert that at the moment consciousness tapers off< awakening
will immediately occur.
On the other hand< if lapses do not occur< and are replaced
by complete alertness< the following tricks of the trade may help?
full concentration on mental actions or< con9ersely< musing and
daydreaming in parallel with the techni'ue being used. &t should
be noted that these are only effecti9e at the initial stages of
working with direct techni'ues since such techni'ues ha9e a
strong sleep0inducing effect.
&f direct techni'ues do not lead to light sleep or singular
lapses after a long period of regular practice< then it must be
assumed that the practitioner is dealing with some appreciable
error in techni'ue or in the length of performance.
Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be
modified by body position during practice or by changing the
9ariation used while performing techni'ues.
ntering the phase with a free0floating state of mind most
often occurs as the result of three key factors. 4irst< one techni'ue
or another may begin to work well during a lapse. !econd<
nearness to the phase may une1pectedly manifest itself through
sounds or 9ibration after a lapse. *uring this< transitioning to
techni'ues that correspond to the abo9e symptoms :listening in<
straining the brain; may be applied. Third< when e1iting a lapse< it
is sometimes easy to separate or 'uickly find a working techni'ue
by paying attention to initial indicators.
Dapses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 122E
of cases. =owe9er< stri9ing to achie9e lapses plays a 9ery
important role since they are not always percei9able< and a lapse
occurrence is not always ob9ious. They can be 9ery short in
duration or shallow. Or< they may not occur at all. /onetheless<
properly applied techni'ues to produce lapses may gi9e entrance
to the phase.
A.0I,IAR* FA%TORS
-5
7sing direct techni'ues in the e9ening or in the middle of
the night take ad9antage of the body8s natural state of fatigue and
for practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. 4or
e1ample< direct techni'ues more easily lead to success if the
practitioner is considerably sleep0depri9ed. Moreo9er< in such a
state< inducing a free0floating state of mind may be forgone. The
most important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately< in
addition to employing the appropriate 9ariations with the
techni'ues. ,illful depri9ation of sleep is torturous and useless
e9en though great results may be achie9ed by an e1perienced and
knowledgeable practitioner in a se9erely fatigued state. %eginners
are better off approaching all forms of practice in a natural<
balanced way.
6n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of
sleep depri9ation@ physical and emotional fatigues also play
important roles. &n that case< the most important thing is not to fall
asleep when performing the techni'ues< and thus one must select
a more acti9e techni'ue 9ariation than usual.
STRATEG* FOR A%TIO(
*irect techni'ues seldom produce 'uick and clear results<
unlike entering the phase 9ia becoming conscious while dreaming
or through the use of indirect techni'ues. 6t first< direct
techni'ues produce sporadic results< which is why the path of
practice should not begin with direct techni'ues hoping for fast
results. &t is better to systematically practice a techni'ue< working
toward mastery on a consistent basis.
There is no cause for worry if results are achie9ed after a
month of daily attempts. 6 continual effort to analy>e practice
and impro9e should be the primary focus because failures are
always caused by distinguishable mistakes.
6lthough difficulties may arise with direct techni'ues< one
should ne9er abandon what worked until then :i.e. indirect
techni'ues;< as this could temporarily depri9e one of the
e1perience that one has gained so far.
--
6 combination of direct and indirect techni'ues should
ne9er be used during the course of a single day since this would
be detrimental to practical focus and enthusiasm. &t is better to
separately perform each type of techni'ue on different days. 4or
e1ample< direct techni'ues could be used before falling asleep
during the workweek while indirect techni'ues may be practiced
during the weekends when a practitioner has more chances to
e1periment using the e1tra opportunities to sleep.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES
WIT' IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
6ssuming an incorrect position when lying down.
Performing direct techni'ues during the day when a
practitioner is ine1perienced< instead of in the e9ening or at night@
Performing more than one attempt per day.
Performing protracted rela1ation before the techni'ues< e9en
when this may play a negati9e role.
Performing the techni'ues for too long when they should be
e1ercised for no more than 22 minutes.
4orgetting to affirm a strong intention of awakening during a
lapse of consciousness.
Dack of a free0floating state of mind. This is mandatory
4alling asleep during lapses in a free0floating state of mind<
instead of working toward multiple lapses while awakening.
4orgetting separation techni'ues and awaiting some unknown
e9ent upon emergence from a lapse< instead of taking ad9antage
of the moment.
1cessi9ely alternating the techni'ues in a primary repertoire<
instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner.
=olding the breath when unusual sensations are encountered.
6lways be calm.
=alting practice when unusual sensations occur when it is
necessary to continue what brought about the sensations.
1cessi9e e1citement while performing direct techni'ues.
Dack of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep
depri9ation.
-(
Dack of a clear plan of action. 7nderstanding and planning the
use of distinct 9ariations of the techni'ues beforehand is crucial to
the analysis of subse'uent errors in practice.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER ?
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hich techni'ues should be mastered before proceeding
to direct techni'uesJ
2. !hould results from the use of direct techni'ues be
e1pected after se9eral days or a weekJ
). &s it better to practice direct techni'ues during the day or
in the e9eningJ
+. &s it correct to perform three direct attempts per dayJ
5. ,hich body position should be assumed when suffering
from insomniaJ
-. ,hich body position should be used by a person who falls
asleep 'uicklyJ
(. =ow much time should be spent on a single direct
attemptJ
3. ,hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of
time than usualJ
.. ,hat is the best way for an ine1perienced practitioner to
rela1J
12. "an direct techni'ues substitute rela1ation techni'uesJ
11. "an rela1ation techni'ues substitute direct techni'uesJ
12. =ow many 9ariations for performing direct techni'ues are
thereJ
1). &n what case is the 9ariation of se'uencing with direct
techni'ues employedJ
1+. ,hich techni'ue may not be used for direct entrance to
the phase with the goal of creating a free0floating state of
mindJ
15. ,hat happens to consciousness while in a free0floating
state during direct techni'uesJ
1-. !hould awakening be attempted if falling asleep occurred
while using direct techni'uesJ
-3
1(. ,hat is the probability of entering the phase without a
free0floating state of consciousnessJ
13. ,hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni'ues
most often end inJ
1.. &s se1ual acti9ity before an e9ening attempt using direct
techni'ue beneficialJ
Ta$k$
1. "hoose the best body position for direct techni'ues based
on your indi9idual preferences.
2. 7se the classical 9ariation of performing direct techni'ues
until it phase entrance< or falling asleep se9eral times.
). 7sing a combination of 9ariations for direct techni'ues<
achie9e a free0floating state of mind.
+. ,hen performing direct techni'ues< try to achie9e no less
than three lapses in consciousness before 22 minutes elapse<
or before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase
entrance is achie9ed.
-.
%hapter @ & Beco7i"# %o"$ciou$ While
rea7i"#
T'E %O(%EPT OF TE%'(I-.ES I(3O,3I(G
BE%O)I(G %O(S%IO.S W'I,E REA)I(G
The techni'ues for phase entrance 9ia becoming conscious
while dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self0
awareness during a dream< which< regardless of dream 'uality<
can be transitioned into a fully reali>ed phase e1perience.
"ontrary to popular opinion< ha9ing an out0of0body e1perience
through dreaming differs little from other techni'ues@ the primary
results of which may be persistently categori>ed as dissociati9e
e1periences? being fully conscious while remo9ed from the
perception of a physical body.
The realism of a phase induced through becoming
conscious in a dream does not differ from phases entered using
other techni'ues< and< when deepened< the phase offers more
9i9id and lucid e1periences than those of e9eryday life.
&f a practitioner becomes aware of a dream while in it
:usually accompanied by a clear reali>ation that it is< A5ust a
dreamB;< then the phase is e1perienced from that moment
forward.
%eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious
while dreaming with induced dreaming. 6n induced dream is the
dream of a specific topic< pro9oked on demand@ this does not
presuppose consciousness. Moreo9er< not all practitioners clearly
understand what it means to be fully conscious while dreaming.
"onsciousness while dreaming is always present to some e1tent<
but it is necessary to be as conscious as one would be in a wakeful
state. 6wareness is not possible as long as the plot of the dream
continues. ,hen full understanding occurs that e9erything around
is 5ust a dream< a person drops the dream and starts doing only
(2
what he wants to do at that 9ery moment. 6nd after awakening<
he should not think that what happened was absurd or
une1plainable.
*uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream< a
practitioner8s actions must be completely subordinated to the
desire to e1perience a 'uality phase. This is why< upon becoming
conscious in a dream< proceeding to techni'ues related to
deepening and maintaining is crucial.
Techni'ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ 9ery
much in nature from other techni'ues< and there are good reasons
why these methods are differentiated from other practices< like so0
called astral pro6ection or out-of-"ody e,perience COB70.
=owe9er< their characteristics differ 9ery little in terms of results.
The techni'ue0related peculiarities rest in the fact that
specific actions are not re'uired to produce immediate< concrete
results. 6ll techni'ue0related elements are performed outside of
when consciousness while dreaming occurs. This is because it is
impossible to take some action if you are not conscious and do
not reali>e that you are dreaming. 6ll efforts are directed at
making that 9ery reali>ation somehow occur.
Interesting Fact!
7ven if a practitioner pays no
heed to the techni9ues for "eco#ing
conscious $hile drea#ing, "ut applies
direct or indirect techni9ues, on average
each fifth phase $ill still occur through
"eco#ing conscious in a drea#) This
has "een statistically proven at se#inars
of the School of Out-of-Body Travel)

Many stri9e to achie9e consciousness during each dream
o9er the course of an entire night@ howe9er< this is rarely possible
due to physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep
and dreams are an important part of a human life. There is an
important need to switch off not only body< but also
consciousness< so that it may unconsciously sift and process the
9ast 9olume of information obtained in e9eryday life.
(1
The timeframe for achie9ing conscious dreaming is 9ery
difficult to estimate due to the nature of re'uired actions. &ntensity
and intention definitely e1ert hea9y influence. 6 practitioner may
become conscious in a dream when first lapsing into sleep<
regardless of when it occurs. Or< with regular attempts< this could
happen in two weeks to a month. /e9ertheless< these techni'ues
promise a much higher likelihood of success than direct methods<
and can be compared with indirect techni'ues 0 inferior to the
latter only in terms of the speed at which results are achie9ed and
the amount of effort re'uired. ,hile indirect techni'ues yield
ma1imum results in light of a full night8s rest< the amount of time
spent in bed is not a significant factor to achie9ing dream
consciousness. Therefore< this techni'ue is sure to guarantee entry
into the phase< especially if difficulty has been encountered while
practicing other techni'ues.
Techni'ues used to attain dream consciousness should not
be combined with other types of techni'ues. &t is better to focus
on one thing at a time. +nterestingly, $hen a techni9ue is
practiced on a regular "asis, there is nearly a 1< guarantee
that drea# consciousness $ill spontaneously occur) .
practitioner #ust %no$ ho$ to react $hen this happens)
TE%'(I-.ES FOR BE%O)I(G
%O(S%IO.S I( A REA)
&t is possible to simultaneously practice se9eral techni'ues
for becoming conscious in a dream since e9ery techni'ue is
directly compatible and complementary to another.
Re7e7beri"# rea7$
There is a well known and widespread of fallacy that
supposes that dreams do not occur for some people. 9eryone
dreams< but not e9eryone remembers their dreams. 9en those
who acti9ely dream remember only a small fraction of these
nightly e1cursions. =ence< one should not think that it is
impossible for someone who does not remember dreams to
become conscious in one. !uch a person should simply try to use
the techni'ues.
(2
6t the same time< there is a direct correlation between the
number of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming
conscious while dreaming. That is why de9eloping the ability to
remember dreams is crucial. &n essence< the ability to achie9e
dream consciousness rests with the conscious mind< which is 9ery
much interconnected with memory0related processes.
"onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams< but it lacks
rapid< operati9e memory. *reamers may know who they are< their
names< how to walk< and how to talk< but may not know how
surrounding e9ents are related< or the nature of their significance.
%y increasing the fre'uency of remembered dreams< short0
term dream memory becomes more de9eloped< which enables
more realistic dream e1periences followed by a higher probability
of dream consciousness.
There are three techni'ues dedicated to increasing the
number of remembered dreams.
The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon
awakening. ,ithin the first few minutes of waking up< try to
remember as many dreams from the night before as possible. This
should be done with a great amount of attention and diligence
because this e1ercise strengthens the memory. &f possible< during
the day< or< better yet< before going to sleep at night< recalling the
pre9ious night8s dreams once again is highly beneficial.
,riting dreams down in a special dream 5ournal is much
more effecti9e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning
while memories are still fresh. The more details recalled when
recording the dream< the better the ultimate results. This is a 9ery
attenti9e approach that demands a higher awareness than simple
recollection. ,riting dreams in a 5ournal significantly increases
awareness of actions and aspirations.
6nother way of remembering dreams is to create a map of
the dream world. This is called drea# cartography and is similar
to keeping a 5ournal< though an enhanced le9el of awareness is
de9eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map.
4irst< record one dream< describing locations and e9ents<
which are plotted on the map. This cartographic process is
repeated with each subse'uent dream< and after se9eral dreams an
episode will occur that is somehow related to the location of a
()
dream that has already been recorded. The two dreams that took
place near each other are plotted ne1t to each other on the map.
O9er time< more and more interrelated dreams will occur and the
map will become increasingly concentrated rather than
disconnected. 6s a result< the fre'uency and realistic 'uality of
remembered dreams will increase< and the dreamer will increase
the ability to achie9e consciousness while dreaming.
&t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after
temporary awakenings 9ersus waiting until morning. To
accomplish this< it helps to ha9e a pen and a piece of paper nearby
so that a practitioner may 'uickly 5ot down a phase or se9eral key
words from the plot of the dream before falling back asleep.
7sing this information< the ma5ority of dreams are 'uickly and
completely recalled.
The initial result from e1ercising these techni'ues is a
rapid increase in the number of remembered dreams. ,hen this
number becomes significant :anywhere between fi9e and 12 per
night;< dream consciousness follows on a regular basis.
I"te"tio"
&ntention is crucial to the success of any techni'ue. ,ith
regard to dream consciousness< its significance is multiplied. The
creation of intention is ine1tricably linked to the creation of
internal aspiration< which has re9erberations in both conscious
and unconscious states. &n reality< an ele9ated degree of intention
operates as a powerful method of mental programming.
This techni'ue is performed before falling asleep by
affirming a strong desire to become conscious while dreaming.
4or best results< alongside a strong< clearly defined intention<
think through what actions will be taken when dream
consciousness is achie9ed.
%reati"# a" A"chor
!ince dream consciousness is not linked to specific actions
that take place within a dream and sensory perception continues
to operate in the dream state< it is possible to de9elop and use an
artificially conditioned refle1 to achie9e consciousness. The
essence of this techni'ue is to train the consciousness to
(+
uniformly react to certain stimuli that occur while being awake
and when dreaming< establishing a habit of specific response
e9ery time a certain situation occurs.
4or e1ample< while awake< a practitioner may ask< A6m &
dreamingJB e9ery time they see an anchor. 6n anchor is any
ob5ect that is often encountered while awake and while dreaming.
1amples of anchors include a practitioner8s own hands< red
ob5ects< or running water. ,hen first using this techni'ue< a
practitioner will be unable to 'uestion whether a dream is in
progress e9ery time a pre0established anchor is encountered.
=owe9er< with training and a strong desire this techni'ue 'uickly
produces results. O9er time< subconscious 'uestioning of the
practitioner8s state becomes habit< happening while awake and
dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness.
&t is important to note that one needs not only to simply
ask this 'uestion< but that it is also important to answer it
mindfully< trying to isolate oneself from surrounding e9ents in
order to be able to answer it in an as ob5ecti9e and
unpredetermined way as possible. 4ailing to answer ob5ecti9ely
will always result in a negati9e response :no;< and dream
consciousness will not be achie9ed.
(atural A"chor$
&n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce
conscious dreaming< natural anchors should be gi9en focused
attention. These are ob5ects and actions that regularly cause dream
consciousness< e9en when consciousness is not desired. %eing
aware of the e1istence of natural anchors actually doubles the
chances of their appearance.
The following e1periences are common natural anchors
that are present in dreams? death< sharp pain< intense fear< stress<
flying< electric shock< se1ual sensations< and dreaming about
phase entrance or the phase en9ironment. ,hen attempting dream
consciousness< identifying natural anchors produces results nearly
122E of the time.
One may try to start flying each time that one answers the
'uestion. This is of course pointless when in waking reality.
(5
=owe9er< when dreaming< this will most likely lead to flight and
once again pro9e that e9erything around is 5ust a dream.
Self-A"aly$i$
"onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons
for an absence of conscious awareness? these analyses are
significant to attaining dream consciousness. O9er the course of a
lifetime< the mind grows accustomed to the parado1ical nature of
dreams and pays less attention to them. This becomes apparent
while trying to understand that a red crocodile is unable to talk<
cannot be red< nor can it rent an apartment. ,hile dreaming< these
impossibilities are ne9er called into 'uestion. The essence of self0
analysis is remembering dreams and thinking hard about why
their parado1ical features had not been ade'uately recogni>ed in
the dream state.
,ith e1perience< the e9eryday analysis of the
correspondence of dreams to reality begins to ha9e an effect on a
practitioner8s reasoning within the dream state. 4or e1ample< that
red crocodile8s presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts
that gi9e pause for reflection< which could in turn lead to the
understanding that e9erything happening is 5ust a dream.
A%TIO(S TO BE O(E W'E( BE%O)I(G
%O(S%IO.S W'I,E REA)I(G
To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully
de9eloped phase e1perience< one of three specific actions must be
taken.
The best is the techni'ue is deepening< which should be
immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs.
*eepening must be performed within the dream episode before all
other techni'ues. *oing so 9irtually guarantees entrance to the
phase. The choice of actions that follow deepening is dependent
upon a practitioner8s predetermined course of plan in the phase.
,hen becoming conscious while dreaming< it is 'uite
dangerous to try to return to one8s body in order to roll out of it
right away unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result
in a situation where< after ha9ing easily returned to one8s body<
(-
one would not be able to separate from it< as the phase becomes
significantly weaker when physical sensations coincide with the
position of a real body. &f one is to employ such an option< then in
order to return to one8s body one should simply think about it<
which is often sufficient to make the transition occur almost
immediately.
6nother option is the use of translocation techni'ues to
arri9e at a desired place within the phase world. &t is also
dangerous to employ this 9ariation without first deepening@
translocating in a shallow phase makes a return to the wakeful
state 9ery likely. Translocation is often accompanied by a
substantial decrease in the depth of the phase state.
STRATEG* FOR A%TIO(
To achie9e dream consciousness< constant practice is
highly necessary because sporadic practice will fail to de9elop the
re'uisite background thought processes.
6s a rule< employing phase entry techni'ues within the
conte1t of dream consciousness produces results after se9eral
weeks< and the effects of the techni'ues are increasingly
pronounced with time. &f there are no results within a month or
two< refrain from these techni'ues for a period of time< take a
break for a week or two< and resol9e to assume a fresh start later.
Practitioners often stop using these techni'ues after initial
results as later effects become elusi9e and the fre'uency of dream
consciousness rapidly declines. These techni'ues should not be
abandoned after first yielding results< though a gradual decrease
in practice is generally acceptable.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES W'E( PRA%TI%I(G
BE%O)I(G %O(S%IO.S W'I,E REA)I(G
Percei9ing the state of dream consciousness as a non0phase
state e9en though this phenomenon is one and the same with the
phase.
((
6ttempting dream consciousness while performing other
phase entrance techni'ues when it is better to focus on dream
consciousness alone.
,hen falling asleep< lacking sufficient desire to e1perience
conscious dreaming e9en though this is critical.
"ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e9en after achie9ing
dream consciousness< whereas subse'uent actions must be
independent and based on free will.
&ncorrectly answering the 'uestion A6m & dreamingJB while
dreaming.
4orgetting to immediately begin deepening techni'ues when
dream consciousness has been achie9ed.
,hen e1ercising memory de9elopment< recalling the most
9i9id dreams instead of e9ery dream.
&nconsistent concentration while practicing dream
consciousness techni'ues.

E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER @
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hat is the difference between an out0of0body e1perience
and dream consciousnessJ
2. 6fter attaining dream consciousness< does the realistic
'uality of the surroundings differ from that of wakefulnessJ
). ,hich techni'ue can be used in a dream to become
conscious in itJ
+. &s it possible to achie9e dream consciousness after the first
attemptJ
5. &s it true that not all people dreamJ
-. ,hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible
important for becoming conscious while dreamingJ
(. ,hat is dream cartographyJ
3. To e1perience dream consciousness< what must be done
while falling asleepJ
.. "ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie9e
dream consciousnessJ
(3
12. ,hat e1periences in dreams often spontaneously gi9e rise
to a state of conscious awarenessJ
11. ,hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious
while dreamingJ
Ta$k$
1. 9ery day< immediately before going to sleep< culti9ate a
strong desire to become conscious in future dreams.
2. ,hen you wake up< recall or write down the episodes and
plots of your dreams e9ery day.
). Try to achie9e at least one instance of dream
consciousness.
(.
%hapter < & (o"-auto"o7ou$ )ethod$
T'E ESSE(%E OF (O(-A.TO(O)O.S
)ET'OS
FOR E(TERI(G T'E P'ASE
4on-autono#ous #ethods of entering the phase are
various types of e,ternal influences that are a"le to help put a
practitioner into the phase state) "omputer programs< de9ices<
9arious physical actions< the aid of a helper< or e9en chemical
substances are e1amples of non0autonomous methods. &n certain
cases< these methods actually help while some hinder the
possibility of a genuine phase e1perience.
/e9er count on a magical substance or machine to
automatically eliminate the difficulties associated with phase
entrance. &f such a substance e1isted< the whole topic of phase
e1perimentation would e1ist at an ad9anced le9el of de9elopment
and pre9alence in society.
&n actuality< there are no de9ices or methods able to
consistently pro9ide access to the phase state. 6t best< these e1ist
in a largely supplementary capacity< and the more a practitioner is
able to do on his or her own< the more helpful and effecti9e these
supplements are. &f phase entry has not been mastered
autonomously< then results through the use of supplements will be
totally accidental.
The reason behind the weak effecti9eness of non0
autonomous methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the
physiological process responsible for the phase e1perience cannot
be e1actly defined. Only generalities are known< nothing else. &n
order to gain a clear understanding of the state< the processes that
gi9e rise to it must be discerned and analy>ed. 6ll e1isting
technologies ha9e either blundered down a clearly mistaken path
32
:synchroni>ing the hemispheres of the brain;< or tra9elled toward
the detection and use of indirect indicators :cueing technologies;.
%.EI(G TE%'(O,OGIES
Of all non0autonomous assistance methods< cueing
technologies yield the best results. The operating principle behind
cueing technologies is 'uite simple? a de9ice detects rapid eye
mo9ement :RM; and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner<
prompting dream consciousness or an awakening that may be
followed by indirect techni'ues. "ueing programs or de9ices may
also send indicators o9er specific inter9als of time@ these are
recei9ed during RM sleep and are meant to cause a sleeping
practitioner to awaken and attempt indirect techni'ues.
More sophisticated RM0detecting technologies may be
purchased at speciali>ed stores or through online merchandisers.
RM0detecting technologies work by 9irtue of special night mask
e'uipped with a motion sensor that detects the fre'uency of
specific eye mo9ements that occur during RM sleep. ,hen the
eye mo9ements reach RM 'uality< the de9ice sends discreet
signals to the practitioner through light< sound< 9ibrations< or a
combination of these. &n turn< the practitioner must discern the
signal and react to it while sleeping with the goal of phase entry
through dream consciousness.
The effecti9eness of RM0detecting de9ices is more
plausible in theory than in practice. The mind 'uickly de9elops a
tolerance for these types of e1ternal stimuli and stops reacting<
and< as a result< such technologies are hardly used more than one
or two nights per week. !econdly< a practitioner will detect only a
small portion of the signals< and conscious reaction occurs in e9en
smaller instances.
"ueing technologies are best used to send signals that
allow a practitioner to awaken without mo9ing during RM sleep<
which facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through
Pricing of these Amind0machinesB :the common moniker
of any de9ice that purports to produce altered consciousness;
widely 9aries and is determined by 'uality of RM detection and
31
signaling. 69ailable models include? *ream!talker< *reamMaker
:/o9a*reamer;< RM0*reamer< 6stral "atapult< among many
others. !ince the use of these de9ices does not guarantee
increased success in practice< in9esting money in the technology
is not recommended. &f a practitioner is curious about cueing
technologies< similar de9ices may be constructed at home using a
special computer program and a run0of0the0mill optical mouse.
*esigns for a homegrown setup are easily located on the &nternet.
6nother do0it0yourself way of e1perimenting with cueing
is through the use of a computer< a music player< or e9en the
alarm clock function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa9es
short sounds or phrases< played as an alarm e9ery 15 to )2
minutes while sleeping. These sounds will signal the practitioner
to wake up and attempt indirect techni'ues.
&f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology<
se9eral fundamental principles should be considered as results
will be less likely if they are ignored. 4irst< mind0machines should
be used no more than twice a week. Otherwise< too high a
tolerance will be built up< rendering the machines ineffecti9e.
!econd< use cueing technology in combination with the deferred
method< which was co9ered in the section on indirect techni'ues.
&t is better to sleep for si1 hours without distraction and then< after
sleep has been interrupted< put on a sleep0mask or earpiece and
continue sleeping. !leep will be light for the remaining two to
four hours as there will be more RM sleep< making it easier for
the mind to detect cueing signals. 4inally< master indirect
techni'ues before making use of cueing technologies to attain
dream consciousness and subse'uent phase entrance.
WOR/I(G I( PAIRS

,orking in pairs is considered the second most effecti9e
non0autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner
is to be the acti9e one< and the other fills the role of helper. The
acti9e one practitioner attempts to enter the phase while the helper
pro9ides 9arious types of support to this end.
4or e1ample< the acti9e practitioner lies down in bed while
the helper stays nearby< waiting for the acti9e one to fall asleep.
32
,hen sleep occurs< the helper obser9es the eyes of the acti9e<
watching for the signs of RM sleep< which is mainly
characteri>ed by 'uick eye mo9ements. ,hen RM is apparent<
the helper whispers to the sleeper< communicating that e9erything
the practitioner is e1periencing is a dream. The helper may 9ary
the 9olume of the whisper< use touch to strengthen the signal< or
shine a flashlight on the sleeper8s eyelids # which is 9ery
effecti9e.
The acti9e practitioner should detect the signals without
waking and indicate a state of conscious awareness by performing
'uick< cyclical eye mo9ements. &f no such indication is gi9en< the
helper continues to rouse the acti9e practitioner< who may finally
wake.
&f the acti9e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream<
indirect techni'ues should be performed. The acti9e practitioner
should under no circumstances mo9e upon awakening or waste
9aluable seconds before transitioning to indirect attempts. &f
phase entrance does not occur after e1ercising the techni'ues< the
practitioner should again fall asleep with the intention of making
another attempt.
$enerally< se9eral such attempts are enough to glean
results. ,orking in pairs is best performed 5ust prior to a daytime
nap< or with the same deferred method used for indirect
techni'ues 0 an early0morning interruption of a practitioner8s
nighttime sleep.
TE%'(O,OGIES FOR I(.%I(G T'E P'ASE
The ambition to create a de9ice facilitates 'uick and easy
phase entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies
that claim to fulfill such a role. 6s already stated< none of these
de9ices has been pro9en effecti9e.
The most famous of these is the =emi0!ync system< which
purports to synchroni>e the two hemispheres of the brain. =emi0
!ync was de9eloped by Robert Monroe< an 6merican esotericism
e1pert researcher. The idea behind =emi0!ync is that out0of0body
sensations may be induced by achie9ing synchroni>ation of the
brain8s two hemispheres. =owe9er< this type of approach yields a
3)
parado1 for the lack of scientific :or pseudo0scientific; e9idence
that hemispheric synchroni>ation influences sensory perception.
6ctually< it is the cerebral corte1 and constituents that are
primarily responsible for sensory perception. 6t the beginning of
the 22
th
century< it became clear that the key roles in sensory
processes are played by 9arying le9els of inhibition and acti9ity in
the cerebral corte1< and almost not elsewhere.
The key to sol9ing the problem of technologically induced
phase entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral
corte1. !ynchroni>ation de9ices ha9e no effect on the operation of
the cerebral corte1. The idea of using sounds of 9arious
fre'uencies to induce a specific le9el of electrical acti9ity in the
brain is< so far< considered impossible. Thus< the sounds and
noises used to assist separation from the body cannot directly
affect the process< but merely ser9e as cueing signals. !uch a
system works only after ha9ing been used for a long time< if it
works at all. Moreo9er< it might only work once or twice.
/e9ertheless< synchroni>ation systems are able to help
practitioners reach a free floating state of consciousness since the
systems pre9ent sleep or induce wakefulness< pro9iding fertile
ground for direct phase entry. =owe9er< the systems ha9e nothing
at all to do with synchroni>ing the two hemispheres of the brain.
The idea of inducing 9arious phase states through sound
has gained wide attention. Many other programs and technologies
ha9e appeared as a result< including< for e1ample< the %rain ,a9e
$enerator :%,$;< which allows the practitioner to independently
e1periment with a wide array of sounds and fre'uencies and
9arious methods of transmission. The effect is the same? cueing
during sleep or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus< there
is no noticeable difference between using machines and listening
to similar sounds or musical compositions.
&nasmuch as the de9ices described abo9e ha9e not
deli9ered notable result< the search for new technologies
continues unhindered. The number of ideas to e1ert nonin9asi9e
influence o9er the brain and its constituent parts is increasing. 4or
e1ample< there is a theory that phase e1periences may be induced
by electromagnetically stimulating the left angular gyrus.
=owe9er< this< like all other non0autonomous methods< is strictly
3+
based on theory. 6t present< consistent< focused< unassisted
practice is the simplest and only guaranteed means to achie9ing
phase entrance.
'*P(OSIS A( S.GGESTIO(
=ypnosis is a little0studied method of entering the phase.
The idea is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the
phase through suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that
hypnosis is an interesting concept< especially for persons who
easily yield to power of suggestion< but such indi9iduals account
for only 1E of the population.
*ue to specific characteristics of human perception< the
chances are nil that hypnosis is a likely conduit to phase entrance.
!o< it seems unlikely that hypnotic techni'ues will become well0
known< or that a top0notch hypnotist would< through suggestion<
easily be able to lead a sub5ect directly into the phase.
=owe9er< it is completely feasible that hypnotic
suggestion may promote higher fre'uency in dream
consciousness or awakening without mo9ing :and remembering
to do indirect techni'ues;. =ere again< this method is only a
facilitator< while actual phase entrance depends on the efforts of
the practitioner.
P'*SIO,OGI%A, SIG(A,S
The simplest way to supplement the practice is
establishing a reminder that prompts conscious awakening and
subse'uent indirect techni'ues. This may be accomplished by
blindfolding the eyes or tying a cord taut around an arm or leg.
The idea is that the reminder is immediately felt when the
practitioner wakes< prompting the attempt of indirect techni'ues.
&n actuality< mind0machines work using the same principle since
these are most effecti9e as cues that arouse an intention to
perform a specific action.
6 more sophisticated e1ample of a reminder is when a
practitioner do>es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a
certain body part. ,hile awakening< the practitioner will take the
35
physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni'ues. 6
secondary benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that
the numb body part may easily be used to perform phantom
wiggling. 4alling asleep while lying on the back with an arm
behind the head< or by lying directly on an arm are effecti9e
e1amples. These and other postures will impede circulation< cause
numbness< and promote awakening. /aturally< the numbness
should not be e1cessi9e.
*i9erse e1periments that e1ploit physiological needs are
especially popular for inducing conscious awakening or becoming
conscious while dreaming. 4or e1ample< a practitioner may forgo
water o9er the course of the day before attempting to enter the
phase. The effect is an acute thirst while dreaming< which may be
used to communicate that the dream state has taken o9er. Or<
thirst causes repeated awakenings< during which the practice of
indirect techni'ues may commence. 6n alternati9e to depri9ing
the body of water is including more salt in foods consumed before
going to sleep.
6nother method is to drink a lot of water before sleep<
causing the practitioner to awaken< naturally producing an
opportunity to perform indirect techni'ues. 7sing this has been
known to result in dream consciousness.
6nother popular method helps with direct techni'ues. &t
works by falling asleep while keeping the forearm propped up at
the elbow. ,hen the practitioner falls asleep< the forearm falls to
the bed as the body shuts down. 4eeling the arm fall signals a
lapse of consciousness< after which direct techni'ues may be
attempted. &f this method fails to produce results on the first try< it
may be repeated by raising the forearm before falling asleep. This
method helps some< but rarely on the first try. &t should not be
counted as panacea.
Dike all other non0autonomous methods< practicing phase
entrance using physiological signals should not be done on a
regular basis. There are more pleasant< autonomous techni'ues
that only re'uire a natural willpower and healthy desire.

%'E)I%A, S.BSTA(%ES
3-
!ince the beginning< the history of ad9ances in phase
entrance methodologies has included a direct link to the use of
consumable supplements< starting with plants and mushrooms in
ancient times. The use of speciali>ed herbs< mushrooms< and cacti
is still practiced in isolated cultures@ !iberian shamans and /orth
6merican &ndians< for e1ample. 6mid the hunger for altered
states of awareness< these chemical supplements ha9e reached
e9ery corner of the de9eloped world. =owe9er< the proliferation
of these substances has caused a marked degradation in the
progress of modern phase practice.
The names and descriptions of these 9arious chemical
concoctions< herbs and plants included< are not worthy of
inclusion in this te1t. They are officially considered illegal in
some countries while still a9ailable in the pharmacies of others@
ne9ertheless< they are all dangerous.
There are two primary problems with using such
supplements. 4irst< practicing the phase through the consumption
of chemical substances and 9arious herbal supplements is not a
path to de9elopment< but to ruin. *rug abuse and personal
de9elopment are polar opposites< in no way compatible. "heap
thrills are consistently followed by chemical dependencies and
health problems.
!econd< although a user may e1perience phase sensations
under the influence of such substances< the 'uality of e1perience
is completely different. &t is not only the stability or depth of
phase that are affected by these supplements< but a user8s
consciousness and awareness. The use of substances and the
resultant alteration of mental processes negati9ely impact self0
awareness. The phase must be accompanied by two things? phase
sensations and a complete< conscious awareness. &f one of these is
missing< then the state e1perienced< by definition< is not the phase.
,hen descriptions of these chemically AenhancedB e1periences
are studied< the hallmark of e9ery one is a complete lack of
control.
7sing any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach
the phase must be ruled out. !ummarily< these make it impossible
to e1perience the phase and ultimately destroy physical and
mental health.
3(
T'E F.T.RE OF (O(-A.TO(O)O.S
)ET'OS
FOR E(TERI(G T'E P'ASE
9en though no beneficial non0autonomous technologies
currently e1ist< the future is wide open before them.
,ith the de9elopment of effecti9e technologies< the phase
will cease as the e1clusi9e domain of the initiated and become a
widespread practice. Only then will the :sometimes 5ustified;
stereotypes and pre5udices connected to the mystical nature of the
phenomenon be dispelled< and only then will the phase gain the
necessary attention from researchers needed to ably de9elop the
science of phase practice.
,hen e1ternally applied methods that cause phase
entrance are disco9ered< the human e1perience will drastically
change. These technologies for inducing and monitoring phase
e1periences will open up incredible possibilities. 4or e1ample< it
will be possible to participate in a mo9ie instead of 5ust watching@
people will be able to try and e9aluate products without lea9ing
home@ tra9el throughout designed worlds will take place@
computer games will be substituted with analogous e1periences
including real physical sensations.
The ultimate step would be the unification of phase
e1periences into a collecti9e< parallel world integrated to e1istent
digital networks? the Matri1 :the Mindnet;. 7sing this Matri1< it
will be possible to communicate with someone on the other side
of the planet 0 not 5ust through a broadband 9ideo link< but
literally tDte E tDte.
This 9ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of
possibilities that will open with phase entrance technologies. The
first step toward the future is a thorough< pragmatic< and correct
application of the techni'ues now a9ailable.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES
WIT' (O(-A.TO(O)O.S TE%'(I-.ES
33
The belief that de9ices are able to phase entrance if
autonomous techni'ues fail< e9en though it is much easier to enter
the phase through strictly indi9idual efforts.
,asting a large amount of time and effort on 9arious
technologies to create a phase state. /o such technology e1ists.
7sing cueing technologies on a daily basis< e9en though they
aren8t supposed to be used more than twice a week.
7sing cueing technologies all night long< when it is much
better to use these in con5unction with the deferred method.
7sing cueing technologies without affirming a personal
intention of appropriate reaction to the signals? this is crucial to
cue effecti9eness.
,orking in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep<
e9en though RM sleep occurs infre'uently< and then for only
short periods of time.
,hile working in pairs< the helper gi9ing an acti9e
practitioner too strong a signal. !ignals should be kept discreet to
pre9ent waking the sleeper.
mploying an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre'uency of
dream consciousness.
The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner who is not
susceptible to hypnosis.
7sing physiological signals on a daily basis< causing physical
discomfort 9ersus getting en5oyment out of the practice.
The belief chemical substances promote dissociati9e
e1periences. 6cting on this belief is e'ui9alent to drug abuse.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER <
-ue$tio"$
1. 6re techni'ues based on breathing be considered non0
autonomous methods of entering the phaseJ
2. ,hich non0autonomous and non0chemical means allow
phase entrance after the first attemptsJ
). ,hy is it still not possible to create a de9ice that causes
phase entryJ
3.
+. 6re cueing technologies beneficial to o9ercoming
difficulties with conscious awakeningJ
5. ,hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies
for se9en days in a rowJ
-. "an cueing technologies make use of light signalsJ
(. "an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of
phase entryJ
3. ,ill putting a tight rubber band around an ankle promote
phase entryJ
.. ,hile working in a pair< are both practitioners re'uired to
enter the phaseJ
12. "an the helper be compared to a cueing de9ice while
working in a pairJ
11. ,hen should the helper gi9e the signal that the acti9e
practitioner is dreamingJ
12. ,ould a hypnotist making suggestions about entering the
phase be helpful to e9ery practitionerJ
1). ,hy do phase0inducing technologies sometimes work<
e9en though these are based on flawed theoriesJ
1+. ,hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical
substancesJ
Ta$k$
1. Try using a cueing de9ice se9eral times in con5unction
with the deferred method. "reate a short sound file and set it
to a de9ice that plays the file between 150minute inter9als of
silence.
2. %efore going to sleep at night< try the raised forearm
method of entering the phase se9eral times. 6ttempt this using
the deferred method.
). &f you ha9e the opportunity< try to achie9e entry into the
phase by working in pairs.
.2
Watch now
Se7i"ar$ i" %alifor"ia: (* a"d arou"d the 9orld8
More? www.school.obe4u.com
Ope" your bra"ch of the School i" your city
.1
Part II
)a"a#i"# the Out-of-Body E>perie"ce
%hapter B - eepe"i"#
T'E %O(%EPT OF EEPE(I(G
8eepening refers to techni9ues that induce realistic
perception and a$areness in the phase state)
The phase is not an e1act< fi1ed state where a practitioner
is present or not. &t is a realm of states characteri>ed by a
transition from the usual perception of the physical body to a
complete alienation from it< while maintaining consciousness and
reality of perception< albeit in a different frame of space. The
transition begins with perception of the natural< physical body
followed by a moment of ambiguity where a clear e1perience of
body is intermingled with a sense of the percei9ed body.
6fterward< the percei9ed body enters the phase space< while the
physical body becomes a memory. 6t this point< the percei9ed
senses may be 'uite dull@ for e1ample< 9ision may be blurred or
completely absent. *eepening techni'ues sol9e the problem of
diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase.
!ensory e1periences within a fully reali>ed phase
e1perience are as realistic as those in e9eryday reality. &n almost
one0half of all cases< practitioners obser9e that reality0based
surroundings pale in comparison to 9ibrant detail and color of the
phase space. To this end< after entering the phase< a practitioner
must perform deepening techni'ues to enhance and solidify the
degree and 'uality of phase reality.
.2
4ull spatial perception in the phase only occurs after
deepening techni'ues ha9e been applied. There would be no point
to remaining in the phase without deepening. 4or e1ample< what
is the point in finding a person in phase< if it is not e9en possible
to discern his or her eyes thereJ
+n a considera"le nu#"er of cases, deepening is not
necessary, since the phase e,perience is co#pletely realistic, if
not hyper-realistic) +n cases li%e these, deepening #ay "e
"ypassed)
*eepening is also related to the length of time a
practitioner may remain in the phase. &f an action is taken without
a deep< realistic phase< the e1perience will always be se9eral
times shorter in duration than a phase where deepening
techni'ues had been applied. The properties of the phase space
9ery much depend on its depth. ,hen surroundings are blurry and
unclear< the stability of ob5ects is 9ery weak.
There is a direct correlation between the realism of a phase
and a practitioner8s le9el of awareness< so it is e1tremely
important to ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma1imum
awareness.
Interesting Fact!
The realis# of a deep phase
space is often so great that it causes
uncontrolla"le fear or shoc%
)
.)
*eepening should only be performed following complete
separation from the body. &f initiated before separation< the phase
may end prematurely. &f complete separation does not occur<
primary deepening should be used. 6s regards the deepening
techni'ues themsel9es< there is one main one and there are se9eral
subsidiary ones. The main techni'ue< which does not present any
difficulties< is sufficient for ha9ing a successful practice.
Interesting Fact!
+gnorance of deepening
techni9ues has led to a great nu#"er of
"aseless theories and superstitions)
So#e practices treat differing phase
depths as various states and even
$orlds) +n reality, there are si#ple
actions that ensure a singular phase
e,perience)
PRI)AR* EEPE(I(G TE%'(I-.ES
The goal of primary deepening is to achie9e complete
separation from the body< allowing further actions within the
.+
phase. Primary deepening entails achie9ing two principal
ob5ecti9es? complete separation from the physical body and
anchoring the percei9ed body within the phase space.
,hen separation from the body occurs through the use of
a separation techni'ue< a posture must be assumed that
completely different from the posture of the real< physical body.
The greater the degree of postural similarity between the physical
and percei9ed bodies< the more shallow and brief the phase will
be. 4or e1ample< in the case of hori>ontal le9itation< a 132 turn
must immediately performed< arms and legs spread< adopting a
9ertical posture. 7nder no circumstances should a practitioner in
the phase remain in a posture identical to that of the physical
body.
&f a practitioner is pulled back toward the body after
separation< anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing
or sitting in the phase. Resisting the gra9ity of the physical body
is paramount to remaining in the phase. The result of willful
resistance is directly proportional to the degree of applied effort.
&t will help to grab hold of surrounding ob5ects and hold on to
them@ any means of anchoring the percei9ed body within the
phase are appropriate. &t is possible to start rotating around an
a1is@ not simply imagining the rotation< but performing it with the
percei9ed body as well.
EEPE(I(G T'RO.G' SE(SOR*
A)P,IFI%ATIO(
The more a phase is e1perienced by the sensory faculties<
the deeper and longer the phase will be. !ensory amplification in
the phase is the most effecti9e deepening techni'ue precisely
because it allows the acti9ation of primary internal sensations
during the transition from reality to the phase. There are se9eral
ways to perform sensory amplification.

Falpation is the first deepening techni'ue that should be
recalled when entering the phase.
Fision may be absent at the beginning of a phase
e1perience< but the sensation of occupying a defined space is
.5
almost always present. &n the case of a completely absent sense of
sight< only tactile0kinesthetic perception is possible. That is<
mo9ement throughout a space and the touching ob5ects there is
the only option when 9ision is absent. The sense of touch plays a
key role in the perception of e9eryday reality. 6ccordingly< if the
sense of touch is acti9ely used in the phase space< it is only
natural that the phase will deepen and reach its ma1imum
potential.
Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything
that may be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be
done by 'uickly but carefully percei9ing the feel of surfaces and
shapes. =ands should not remain on a particular place for more
than one second< remaining constantly in motion to locate new
ob5ects. The goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn
something about encountered ob5ects or shapes. 4or e1ample< if
one feels a mug< one may touch it not only from the outside< but
also from the inside. Once a practitioner has rolled out of the
body< the bed may be touched@ the physical body lying in bed
may be touched< as well as the floor< the carpet< nearby walls< or a
bedside table.
6nother palpation techni'ue is performed by rubbing the
palms against each other as if trying to warm them on a cold day.
%lowing on the palms also produces sensations that will help
deepen the phase. !ince tactile perception of the world is not
limited to the palms< the hands should be mo9ed o9er the entire
body while in the phase to e1cite and fully acti9ate the sense of
touch.
6s soon as palpation begins< the feeling that the phase is
deepening and becoming fi1ed soon follows. 7sually< it takes fi9e
to 12 seconds of palpation e1ercises to reach the ma1imum le9el
of deepening. 6fter performing this techni'ue< the pseudo0
physical sensations will be indistinguishable from those of
e9eryday reality. &f 9ision is absent on phase entry< it 'uickly
emerges during palpation.
Feering is the primary technical 9ariation of sensory
amplification. =owe9er< it is not always initially accessible since
it re'uires 9ision< which may begin as absent in the phase. Once
9ision appears or has been created using special techni'ues :see
.-
"hapter 3;< peering may begin. The effecti9eness of this
techni'ue originates in the fact that 9ision is the human8s primary
instrument of perception. Therefore< by e1citing 9ision to its
ma1imum potential within the phase< it is possible to attain a fully
immersi9e phase state that is completely apart from normal
reality.
Peering should be done at a distance of four to si1 inches
from ob5ects within the phase. 6 practitioner should glance o9er
the minute details of ob5ects and surfaces to bring definition to the
phase space while increasing the 'uality of 9ision. ,hen looking
at hands< the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles
should be e1amined. &f obser9ing a wall< study the te1ture of its
wallpaper. ,hen looking at a mug< one should look carefully at
its handle< the cur9e of its rim< or any inscriptions. 6ttention
should not remain on one area of an ob5ect for more than half a
second. 6cti9e obser9ation should constantly mo9e to new
ob5ects and their minute details< approaching ob5ects or picking
them up to draw them nearer. &t8s best when ob5ects near one
another@ otherwise< too much time is spent mo9ing around.
Peering brings 'uick and clear results. 7sually< if 9ision is
blurry and there is a yearning to return into the physical body<
with 5ust )012 seconds of peering all of this will be gone without a
trace. 6fter peering< 9ision ad5usts as 'uickly and clearly as if a
camera lens was correctly installed in front of the eyes< capturing
the image in the sharpest of focus.
Si#ultaneous peering and palpation pro9ide the
ma1imum possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of
sensory amplification engages the two most important percepti9e<
thus the effect is twice greater than when the two actions are
separately performed. &f 9ision is present in the phase<
simultaneous peering and palpation is an absolute necessity
because it facilitates good phase depth in the 'uickest and
simplest manner.
The combination of palpation and peering must not only
be performed simultaneously< but also upon the same ob5ects. 4or
e1ample< while a practitioner may look at the hands and
simultaneously rub them against each other@ or while looking at a
coffee mug< all of its parts may be obser9ed and touched at the
.(
same. &t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action<
remembering that feelings should be e1perienced not half0
heartedly< remembering that full concentration on sensory
amplification is an e1cellent means to a deep< 'uality phase.
SE%O(AR* EEPE(I(G TE%'(I-.ES
ivi"# 'eadfir$t
*i9ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification
techni'ues do not work< or when the practitioner in the phase is
located in an undefined space where there is nothing to touch or
look at. This techni'ue works thanks to the unusual 9estibular
sensations that it causes< which help to enhance perception. This
techni'ue is performed with the eyes shut if 9ision is a9ailable
and the practitioner literally di9es headfirst into the floor or space
at the feet. 6 feeling of mo9ement away from the physical body
will immediately arise during the flight down< and the di9e itself
will be e1perienced as if it is really happening. !imultaneously<
the surrounding space may darken and become colder. 6gitation
or fear may also appear. 6fter fi9e to 15 seconds of flight< the
practitioner is either arri9es in an undetermined place in the phase
or hits a dead end< like a wall. &n the case of a dead end< a
translocation techni'ue should be used. Translocation may also be
attempted if deepening does not occur during the flight< if sense
perception stops impro9ing< or if a good degree of realism has
already been achie9ed. 6n alternati9e to the translocation
techni'ue? hold the hands about four to si1 inches in front of the
face and try to obser9e them without opening the eyes@ this will
mo9e the practitioner to another random location.
,hen falling headfirst< do not think about the floor@
assume that it will be penetrated. This 9ery effecti9e if the phase
has not reached a fullness of depth.
6 desire to not simply fall down obser9ing one8s
perceptions< but instead race swiftly downward while trying to
mo9e away from the body is e1tremely important. &n case of
failure to do so< instead of deepening< such a fall may lead to a
return to the state of being awake< i.e. to a foul.
.3
3ibratio"
Dike falling headfirst< the 9ibration techni'ue should be
used if sensory amplification techni'ues do not work< or when the
practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space where
there is nothing to touch or look at.
6fter separating from the body< it is normally 'uite easy
to create 9ibrations by thinking about them< by straining the brain<
or by straining the body without using muscles. The occurrence of
9ibrations pro9ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase.
6n ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it does not re'uire any
preliminary actions and thus may be practiced at any moment.
The brain is strained to the ma1imum e1tent possible<
which cause 9ibrations that may be intensified and managed
through spasmodic or prolonged straining.
&f this techni'ue does not produce deepening after fi9e to
12 seconds< the techni'ue has to be changed or action should be
taken at the practitioner8s current depth in the phase.
A##re$$ive Actio"
This techni'ue may be used as an alternati9e to any other
deepening techni'ue since it can be used at any moment.
Practicing this techni'ue only re'uires aggressi9e action of the
percei9ed body. 6 practitioner may run< roll on the floor< perform
gymnastics< or mo9e the arms and legs. Ma1imum acti9ity and
aggression are paramount to the successful use of this techni'ue.
&f the practitioner is stuck in a dark space< wa9ing the
arms and legs from side to side is appropriate. &f the practitioner
is in water< swimming with determined< powerful strokes would
be suitable recourse. The type of action 9ery much depends on the
specific situation along with an aggressi9e desire on the part of
the practitioner.
6s a rule< the effect of such mo9ements and relocations
comes 'uite 'uickly< especially if attention is focused on all the
accompanying sensations.
I7a#i"i"# reality
This interesting techni'ue should be used by e1perienced
practitioners< or if all other deepening techni'ues fail.
..
6 practitioner aggressi9ely imagines being located in the
physical world< e1periencing its intrinsic reality of perception<
and not in the phase. This should be done while in a state of
separation from the body with a sense of 9ision present. &f
successful< the surrounding phase space will immediately brighten
and sensory perception of the phase will e1ceed the normal
e1perience of reality.
&f this techni'ue produces no clear results after a few
seconds< another techni'ue should be used.
GE(ERA, A%TI3IT*
6ll deepening techni'ues should be practiced with a high
le9el of aggression< with no pauses< only continuous< deliberate
action. &f techni'ues are practiced in a calm< rela1ed manner< then
deepening attempts will most often result in falling asleep or
returning to the body.

T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES .RI(G EEPE(I(G
4orgetting to perform deepening techni'ues when necessary.
"arrying out unnecessary deepening while at a sufficient
depth.
=alting deepening techni'ues before reaching ma1imum
realism in the phase.
"arrying out main deepening techni'ues prior to ha9ing
become completely separated from the body< although at this time
only primary deepening should be used.
"ontinuing deepening techni'ues when results ha9e already
been achie9ed.
6lternating too 'uickly between deepening techni'ues instead
of concentrating on each of them for at least fi9e to 12 seconds.
Performing the techni'ues slowly and calmly instead of
aggressi9ely.
6pplying techni'ues of sensory amplification while stuck in a
shapeless< dark space when these should only be performed in a
9i9id and realistic place.
122
Obser9ing ob5ects located too far from the eyes during 9isual
sensori>ation instead of the re'uired four to fi9e inches.
,hen peering< scrutini>ing a single detail of an ob5ect for too
long when it is necessary to 'uickly switch from one detail to
another.
Taking in a whole ob5ect when peering while only parts of it
should be obser9ed.
"oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob5ect instead
of focusing on different ob5ects in 'uick succession.
Dong palpation of a single ob5ect during sensory amplification
instead of rapidly switching from one ob5ect to another.
*eepening while standing in place when it is important to
maintain constant motion.
4alling headfirst with the eyes open< although the eyes must
be shut to a9oid crashing into the floor.
4alling headfirst without the desire or intention of falling far
and 'uickly.
4orgetting to use translocation techni'ues after hitting a dead
end.
4orgetting to alternate deepening techni'ues if some of them
are not working.
4ear of the hyperrealism of the e1perience and halting
deepening instead of calmly continuing with the techni'ue.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER B
-ue$tio"$
1. 6fter which phase entrance techni'ues is deepening
necessaryJ
2. ,hy is phase deepening necessaryJ
). 6re there cases where phase deepening is unnecessaryJ
+. ,hat le9el of reality should be achie9ed by deepeningJ
5. ,hen should deepening begin after entering the phaseJ
-. *oes deepening influence the length of a phase
e1perienceJ
(. ,hy is primary deepening necessaryJ
121
3. May one touch one8s head when the performing
sensori>ation of feelingsJ
.. !hould a practitioner look at curtains while peeringJ
12. &s it effecti9e to apply peering at phase ob5ects from a
distance of 1 to 1.5 yardsJ
11. "an peering be used during palpationJ
12. ,hen should the eyes be closed while falling headfirstJ
1). ,ould throwing punches like a bo1er help a practitioner
to deepenJ
1+. =ow calmly should the deepening techni'ues be
performedJ
Ta$k$
1. *e9ote the ne1t three successful phases to perfecting
deepening techni'ues< using all of the methods described in
this chapter.
2. 7sing personal e1perience< try 5udging which techni'ue
suits you best from personal e1perience.
122
%hapter C - )ai"tai"i"#
T'E GE(ERA, %O(%EPT OF )AI(TAI(I(G
Fhase #aintenance or &#aintaining* refers to techni9ues
that allo$ a practitioner to re#ain in the phase for the #a,i#u#
a#ount of ti#e possi"le) ,ithout knowledge of AmaintainingB
techni'ues< the duration of the phase will be se9eral times shorter
than it could otherwise be. The shortest phases last 5ust a few
seconds. %eginning practitioners usually fear not being able to
e1it a phase@ this shouldn8t e9er be a concern because the real
challenge is being able to maintain the phase state< which is easily
lost unless phase maintenance techni'ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles?
resisting a return to the wakeful state :known as a foul;< resisting
falling asleep< and resisting a false e1it from the phase. 6s a rule<
the first two problems :return to a wakeful state< or falling asleep;
12)
are often encountered by beginners< but the third difficulty :false
e1it; manifests at later stages of practice.
Resistance to returning to the body is self0e1planatory<
whereas resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. /ot
e9eryone knows that almost half of phase e1periences usually end
in a 'uite tri9ial way 0 falling asleep. 6 person usually looses
attenti9eness< his or her awareness dissipates< and e9erything
around gradually looses clarity and turns into what is for all
intents and purposes a usual dream.
Resisting a false e1it from the phase is a lot more
surprising and dramatic. !ometimes a practitioner detects an
impending e1it from the phase< subse'uent deepening techni'ues
fail to work< resulting in what seems to be a return to the body
and physical reality. !ure that the phase has ended< a practitioner
may stand up and the fall asleep after percei9ing a few steps. &n
such cases< falling asleep most often happens without any
mo9ement< but while still lying in bed. The problem is that the
difference between the phase and reality can be so subtle that in
terms of internal or e1ternal indicators< the phase practically can8t
be distinguished from reality. Therefore< one must know the
necessary actions to take in the e9ent that the phase ceases< since
the end of a phase could actually be a trick and purely imagined.
There are specific solutions for the three problems
described in addition to general rules that apply to any phase
e1perience. !tudying these rules should be gi9en 5ust as high a
priority as studying the specific solutions< since only some of
them< when applied separately< may help one to remain in the
phase se9eral times longer than usual.
&n some cases< techni'ues for maintaining are not
applicable. =owe9er< knowledge of how to maintain is useful for
the ma5ority of e1periences. 6lso< there might be situations when
someone need only resist a foul< while someone else may need to
resist falling asleep. 6ll of this is 9ery specific to each case and
can be determined only in practice.
,ith perfect knowledge of all the techni'ues for
maintaining< a phase may last two to four minutes< which doesn8t
sound like an e1tended duration< but really is. 6 particularity of
the phase space is that achie9ing something and mo9ing around in
12+
it takes a minimum amount of time< mere seconds. Thus< so much
can be done during ) minutes in the phase that one literally needs
a list< so as not to waste any time.
There are theories that ha9e neither been pro9en nor
dispro9en claiming that time in the phase contracts and e1pands
relati9e to real time. Thus< one minute of real time while in the
phase may feel much longer in terms of phase time.
Perception of time 9aries from practitioner to practitioner.
/o9ices especially percei9e a real minute as more like fi9e to 12
minutes in the phase. This is determined by the particularities of
indi9idual psychology< state of mind< and the type of e9ents that
occur in the phase.
&n order to understand how long a phase really lasted< one
does not need to try using a stopwatch in the real world. &t is
better to count how many actions took place in it and how much
time each of them could ha9e taken. The result will differ from
one8s first rough estimate se9eral times o9er.
The ma1imum duration the phase 9aries depends hea9ily
on the ability to apply phase maintenance techni'ues. !ome
practitioners ha9e difficulty breaking the two0minute barrier
while some find it easy to remain in the phase for 12 minutes or
longer. &t is physically impossible to remain in the phase fore9er
because e9en a 220minute phase is unheard of.

TE%'(I-.ES A( R.,ES AGAI(ST
RET.R(I(G TO T'E BO*
Of the following techni'ues< constant sensory
amplification and as0needed sensory amplification are applied the
most often while performing phase maintenance. =owe9er< as
opposed to other technical elements of phase e1ploration< other
secondary techni'ues of maintaining often become mainstream
and the most appropriate for certain indi9iduals. Thus< all the
techni'ues should be studied< but the first two should be
considered 9ery carefully.
%o"$ta"t Se"$ory A7plificatio"
125
The same sensory amplification described in the chapter
on deepening :"hapter -; also applies to AmaintainingB. &n
essence< ha9ing achie9ed the necessary depth of phase< one
should not stop to acti9ely agitate his or her perception but should
keep on doing this all the while< albeit not as acti9ely as during
deepening.
The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase< all
action should be focused on e1periencing the ma1imum possible
amount of tactile0kinesthetic and 9isual perceptions. This entails
constantly touching and e1amining e9erything in minute detail.
4or e1ample< if passing by a bookcase< touch and e1amine some
of the books in it< including their pages and corners. Tactile
obser9ation should be performed on e9ery encountered ob5ect.
Palpation may be applied separately as a background
sensation. This is done in order not to o9erload the sense of sight.
The hands should be touching something all the time< or better
still< rubbing each other.
A$-(eeded Se"$ory A7plificatio"
6pplying the as0needed sensory amplification techni'ue is
no different than constant sensory amplification. &t is used only
when a foul :a return to a wakeful state; is imminent or when
phase 9ision starts to blur and fade. 4or e1ample< while tra9eling
in the phase e9erything may start to blur< signaling a weakening
of the phase. 6t this moment< the practitioner should touch e9ery
a9ailable ob5ect@ obser9e e9erything in fine detail. 6s soon as
returns to a clear and realistic state< actions may be continued
without needing to perform amplification.
%o"$ta"t 3ibratio"
This techni'ue is used to maintain constant< strong
9ibrations in the phase. 6s pre9iously noted< 9ibrations are
generated by straining the brain or tensing the body without using
muscles. Maintaining strong 9ibrations will ha9e a positi9e effect
on the length of the phase.
Stre"#the"i"# 3ibratio"$ a$ (eeded
12-
&n this case< 9ibrations are created and strengthened only if
signs of a foul become apparent. 1amples of foul indicators
include duality of perception or blurred 9ision. !trengthening
9ibrations will help to deepen the phase< allowing a practitioner to
stay and continue within the phase.
ivi"# 'eadfir$t
This techni'ue is the same as the deepening techni'ue of
the same name. &f a phase is about to dissol9e< di9ing headfirst
with the eyes shut and a desire to di9e as 'uickly and deeply as
possible. 6s soon as phase depth returns< translocation techni'ues
may be used to keep from arri9ing at a dead end.
Forced Falli"# A$leep
6s soon as indicators of a foul appear< immediately lie
down on the floor and attempt forced falling asleep@ the same as
the phase entry techni'ue. 6fter successfully performing the
techni'ue :)012sec.; < a practitioner may get up and continue to
tra9el through the phase since the perception of reality and its
depth will most likely be restored. Resist actually fall asleep.
Rotatio"
&f indicators of a foul appear< the practitioner should start
rotating around the head0to0feet a1is. 7nlike the phase entry
techni'ue of the same name< the mo9ement does not ha9e to be
imagined. This is an absolutely real rotation in the phase. 6fter
se9eral re9olutions< depth will be restored and actions may be
continued. &f indicators of a foul persist< rotation should continue
until proper depth is achie9ed.
%ou"ti"#
*uring the entire phase< count to as large a number
possible 0 not 5ust for the sake of counting< but with a strong
desire to reach the highest number possible. "ounting may be
performed silently or out loud.
This techni'ue works by creating a strong determination
to remain in the phase by pro9iding a goal that re'uires action in
the phase.
12(
,i$te"i"# i"
&f there are any background sounds similar to those heard
while entering the phase 0 rumbling< whistling< ringing< bu>>ing<
or si>>ling # these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the
phase by aggressi9e attempts at listening in< hearing the entire
range of internal sounds. The forced listening in techni'ue may
also be used for phase maintenance.
'ooki"# o"to the pha$e
6nother interesting method of AmaintainingB is hooking
onto the phase. &n the e9ent of an impending foul< grab onto an
ob5ect in the phase acti9ely palpate or s'uee>e it. 9en if a return
to the body occurs during this techni'ue< the hands will continue
to hold the phase ob5ect and the physical hands will not be
percei9ed. %eginning with these phantom feelings in the hands<
separation from the body is possible. 6ny nearby ob5ect may be
hooked? the leg of a chair< a drinking glass< a doorknob< a stone<
or a stick. &f there is nothing to grab hold of< clasp the hands
together or bite down on a lip or the tongue.

Two rules apply to using the techni'ues that help to resist
a phase e1it. 4irst of all< ne9er think that the phase might end and
result in a return to the body@ thoughts like this are like
programming that immediately send the practitioner to a wakened
physical state. !econdly< do not think about the physical body.
*oing will also instantly return the practitioner to the body< e9ery
time.
TE%'(I-.ES A( R.,ES
FOR RESISTI(G FA,,I(G AS,EEP
%o"$ta"t ."der$ta"di"# of the Po$$ibility of Falli"#
A$leep
Most of the time< falling asleep while in the phase can be
o9ercome by a constant awareness that sleep is possible and
detrimental to a continued phase. 6 practitioner must always
consider the probability of falling asleep and actions must be
123
carefully analy>ed to ensure that they are based on real desires
and not on parado1ical notions< which are common to dreams.
Periodic A"aly$i$ of A9are"e$$
Periodically asking the 'uestion< A6m & dreamingJB while
in the phase helps appraise situations and the 'uality of the
actions being performed at any moment. &f e9erything meets the
standards of full phase awareness< actions may be continued.
6sked on a regular basis< this 'uestion becomes habit<
automatically used while transitioning to the phase state. &f you
keep asking this 'uestion regularly< sooner or later it will arise
automatically at the moment when you are actually transitioning
into a dream. This will then help one to wake up< after which it is
possible to continue to remain in a full0fledged phase..
The fre'uency of the 'uestion should be based on a
practitioner8s ability to consistently remain in the phase. &f a
phase usually lasts fi9e to 12 minutes or more< it is not necessary
to ask the 'uestion more than once e9ery 2 minutes@ otherwise<
this 'uestion has to be asked fre'uently< literally once a minute<
or 5ust a little less often.
There is another important rule related to resisting falling
asleep? no practitioner should engage or participate in
spontaneous e9ents occurring in the phase. 9ents that are not
planned or deliberate lead to a high probability of being immersed
in the side action< which results in a loss of concentrated
awareness.
TE%'(I-.ES AGAI(ST
A( .(RE%OG(I6E P'ASE
!ince the techni'ues of testing the realness of the end of
the phase are a little absurd and demand additional attention to
actions< they should only be used in those cases when they are
indeed re'uired. 7ntil then< one should simply bear them in mind
and use them only in moments of doubt. The same methods may
be used to safely determine whether or not the practitioner is in
the phase when using techni'ues for entering it.
12.
'yper-co"ce"tratio"
!ince the cessation of the phase e1perience may be
simulated and no different in terms of perception from a real e1it<
differences between the physical world and the phase world must
be acti9ely discerned. &n other words< a practitioner must know
how to determine whether a genuine phase e1it has occurred.
6t present< only one e1periment is known to guarantee an
accurate result. The phase space cannot withstand prolonged close
9isual attention to the minute details of ob5ects. ,ithin se9eral
seconds of acute e1amination< shapes begin to distort< ob5ects
change color< produce smoke< melt< or morph in other ways.
6fter e1iting the phase< look at a small ob5ect from a
distance of four to si1 inches< and remain focused on it for 12
seconds. &f the ob5ect does not change< a practitioner can be
assured that the surroundings are reality. &f an ob5ect is somehow
distorted or askew< a practitioner knows that the phase is intact.
The simplest option is to look at the tip of the finger since it is
always close at hand. &t is also possible to take a book and
e1amine its te1t. Te1t in the phase will either blur or appear as
alphabetical gibberish< or full of incomprehensible symbols.
Au>iliary tech"i2ue$
There are a 9ariety of other procedures to test the
occurrence of a foul. =owe9er< since any situation< any property<
or any function can be simulated in the phase< these procedures
are not always applicable. 4or e1ample< some suggest that it is
sufficient to attempt doing something that is realistically
impossible< and< if a practitioner is in the phase< the impossible
action will be possible. The problem with this suggestion is that
the laws of the physical world may be simulated in the phase< so
flying< passing through walls or telekinesis may not be possible<
e9en in the deepest phase. &t has also been suggested that looking
at a clock twice in a row may help a practitioner determine
whether or not the phase is intact@ allegedly< the clock will display
a different time each time it is obser9ed. =ere again< the clock8s
display may not change in the phase.
Of all the au1iliary procedures< one deser9es mention and
works in the ma5ority of cases? searching for differences from
112
reality in the surroundings. 6lthough the usual surroundings of a
practitioner may be 122E accurately simulated in the phase< it is
9ery rare. Therefore< it is possible to figure out whether a phase is
intact by carefully e1amining the room where e9erything is taking
place. &n the phase< there will be something e1tra or something
will be missing@ the time of day or e9en the season will be
different from reality< and so on. 4or e1ample< when 9erifying
whether a foul occurred< a room may be missing the table
supporting a tele9ision set< or the table may be there< but be a
different color.
GE(ERA, R.,ES FOR )AI(TAI(I(G
The rules for maintaining the phase deal with resisting all
or most of the problems which cause a phase to end. !ome of
these rules are capable of increasing the length of stay in the
phase by many times and must be followed.
The practitioner should not loo% into the distance) &f
faraway ob5ects are obser9ed for a long period of time< a foul may
occur< or one may be translocated towards these ob5ects. &n order
to look at distant ob5ects without problems< a practitioner has to
employ techni'ues for maintaining. 4or e1ample< from time to
time the practitioner should look at his hands< rub them against
each other< or maintain strong 9ibrations.
?onstant activity) 7nder no circumstances should a
practitioner remain passi9e and calm in the phase. The more
actions performed< the longer the phase is. The fewer actions #
the shorter the phase. &t is enough to pause for thought< and
e9erything stops.
Flan of action) There should be a clear plan of action
consisting of at least 5 tasks to be carried out in the phase at the
earliest opportunity. This is necessary for se9eral important
reasons. 4irst< the practitioner must not pause in the phase to think
about Awhat to do ne1tB< which fre'uently results in a foul.
!econd< ha9ing a plan< the practitioner will subconsciously
perform all of the actions necessary for staying in and maintaining
the phase to carry out all the tasks that ha9e been planned. Third<
intelligent and pre0planned actions permit focused ad9ancement
111
of purposeful actions 9ersus wasting phase e1periences on
whate9er comes to mind at a gi9en moment. 4ourth< a plan of
action creates necessary moti9ation and< conse'uently<
pronounced intent to perform the techni'ues to enter the phase.
Stopping the +8) The less &nternal *ialogue :&*; and
reflection that occurs in the phase< the longer it lasts. 6ll thinking
must be concentrated on what is being achie9ed and percei9ed.
Talking to oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is
that many thoughts may act as programming in the phase and
e9en announcing them internally may introduce alterations<
including negati9e ones. 4or e1ample< thinking about the body
cause a return to it. The practitioner may also get lost in thought<
which will lead to a foul. 6lso< sporadic thoughts usually and
'uite easily cause the practitioner to simply fall asleep.
. practitioner #ust try to re-enter the phase after
e,periencing a foul) 6lways remember that a typical phase
e1perience consists of se9eral repeated entries and e1its.
ssentially< in most cases it is possible to re0enter the phase
through the use of separation or phase state creation techni'ues
immediately after returning to the body. &f the practitioner has 5ust
left the phase< the brain is still close to it and appropriate
techni'ues may be applied in order to continue the 5ourney.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES WIT' )AI(TAI(I(G
4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after it is o9er< although
doing so greatly helps to increase number of e1periences had.
!taying focused on techni'ues for AmaintainingB instead of
performing them as background tasks.
$etting distracted by e9ents and dropping phase maintenance
techni'ues instead of continually performing what8s needed to
maintain the phase.
!uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary
when the phase appears 9ery deep and stable< e9en though these
could be false sensations.
7sing the necessary techni'ues too late.
!topping due to uncertainty about further actions< while there
must always be a plan.
112
4orgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase without
reali>ing it. Recogni>ing the risk of falling asleep must be a
primary focus.
$etting pulled into e9ents occurring in the phase instead of
obser9ing and controlling them from the outside.
4orgetting that techni'ues for AmaintainingB must always be
used to remain in as deep a phase as possible< and not 5ust for
maintaining any odd state.
!topping the use of techni'ues for AmaintainingB during
contact with li9ing ob5ects< when the techni'ues must be used
constantly.
"ounting without the desire to count as high as possible.
Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation.
Passi9eness and calmness instead of constant acti9ity.
1cessi9e thinking and internal dialogue when these should
be kept to an absolute minimum.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER C
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hat is a foulJ
2. ,hat is the minimum duration of the phaseJ
). ,hat do phase maintenance :AmaintainingB; techni'ues
counteract besides fouls and falling asleepJ
+. ,hy might a practitioner think that the phase has ended when
it actually is still in progressJ
5. !hould AmaintainingB techni'ues always be usedJ
-. ,hat primary techni'ues work against the occurrence of
foulsJ
(. =ow can a practitioner hook onto the phaseJ
3. ,hile in the phase< what do thoughts about the body lead toJ
.. ,hat 'uestion should be asked in the phase in order to reduce
the probability of falling asleepJ
12. ,hat happens to an ob5ect during hyper0concentrationJ
11. =ow else< apart from hyper0concentration< might a
practitioner effecti9ely recogni>e a false foulJ
11)
12. ,hile in the phase< is it permitted to look into the distance for
a long timeJ
1). ,hat is &* and how does the degree of it affect the duration
of a phase e1perienceJ
1+. ,hat should a practitioner always do after an inad9ertent
return into the bodyJ
Ta$k$
1. *uring the ne1t few phases< dedicate yourself to the single
goal of maintaining as long as possible< using as many
maintaining techni'ues as you can.
2. 4igure out which techni'ues ha9e pro9en the most
effecti9e and comfortable for you< so that you may use these
later.
). &ncrease the duration of your a9erage phase to at least )
minutes :e9aluated ob5ecti9ely;.
11+
%hapter D - Pri7ary $kill$
T'E ESSE(%E OF PRI)AR* S/I,,S
,hen dealing with a fully0reali>ed phase< re'uisite
knowledge is not limited to entry techni'ues< deepening and
maintenance of the state< translocation< or finding and interacting
with ob5ects. &n order to feel comfortable< a practitioner has to
master or at least acclimate himself with a whole series of
techni'ues to correctly react in any number of situations. 4or
e1ample< a practitioner needs to know how to create 9ision< if it is
absent. 6ctions including passage through a wall or taking flight
in a deep phase do not happen easily< although these actions may
be assumed natural occurrences< since the phase e1ists apart from
the physical world. &n addition to techni'ues that allow interaction
with the physical setting and surroundings of the phase< methods
must learned and applied to counteract fear if it forces a
practitioner to consciously and consistently lea9e the phase.
6 practitioner does not ha9e to know all the primary skills
by heart< but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of
them? emergency return< creation of 9ision< translocation through
ob5ects< contact with animate ob5ects< and< for many< skills
dedicated to fighting fear will also pro9e e1tremely rele9ant.
The final choice of methods that re'uire added focus on
the part of the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal
e1periences and problems faced while in the phase< since different
practitioners often ha9e completely different types of problems.
IS%ER(I(G T'E P'ASE
Problems with phase identification during entry often arise
at the initial stages of studying the phase. 6 practitioner simply
cannot understand whether or not he or she is already in the
115
phase. This uncertainty can manifest while lying down or while
practicing in other postures.
&f a practitioner is simply lying down< physically
percei9ing his own body< and doing nothing< then it is indeed
difficult to determine whether or not he is present in the phase. &t
is sufficient to note that there might be no signs of a phase state.
On the contrary< there may be a host of signs and unusual
sensations< but they by no means necessarily indicate the onset of
the phase.
The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is always
sol9ed through actions. &f the practitioner is lying down< then
standard separation techni'ues may produce indication of phase
achie9ement 0 in the ma5ority of cases # since such techni'ues
may often be incorrectly performed.
&t is possible to perform techni'ues that are only
achie9able in the phase state. &f a practitioner stands up and does
not recogni>e his surroundings< then it can be assumed that the
practitioner is standing up in the phase. =owe9er< often based on
the obser9ation that Ae9erything is as in realityB< a practitioner
may stand up and note that e9erything is in fact Aas in realityB
simply because the practitioner is still in ArealityB. &n answer to
this dilemma< the phenomenon of hyper0concentration has been
pre9iously mentioned in relation to maintaining phase. %y using
hyper0concentration< it is always possible to ascertain whether the
practitioner is in the phase. =owe9er< as a rule< hyper0
concentration is rarely necessary. Most often< the following signs
indicate that separation has occurred in the phase? unusual
sensations in the body during mo9ement< e1treme tightness
during mo9ement< a strong physical urge to lie back down<
dis5ointedness of surroundings< and blurred or complete absence
of 9ision.
Often< the problem resides in the use of direct techni'ues
where the practitioner e1pects fast results and attempts to
determine whether the phase has been achie9ed. 6s a principle
this should not be done. ,hen using direct techni'ues< the phase
manifests itself clearly@ therefore< if an attempt to determine its
presence is made< it is an indicator that the phase is 'uite likely
still far off.
11-
E)ERGE(%* RET.R(; PARA,*SIS
!tatistics show that in one0third of initial phase
e1periences< a practitioner is faced with a degree of fear that
forces a return to the body. Periodically< e9en e1perienced
practitioners face situations that re'uire an abrupt return to
wakefulness. This presents a number of concerns.
&n and of itself< returning to the body is almost always
unproblematic@ remembering and thinking about the body often
suffices and within moments the practitioner is returned to the
body from whate9er location in the phase. 6dmittedly< it is
ad9isable during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain
from touching anything. 6s a rule< when these actions are
performed< simply standing up in the physical world is all that is
re'uired to complete a return@ howe9er< this is not always simply
achie9ed.
!ometimes after reentering the body< the practitioner
suddenly reali>es that physical functionality has ceased due to the
onset of sleep paralysis< or the sensation that the body has been
switched off. *uring sleep paralysis< it is impossible to scream<
call for help< or e9en mo9e a finger. &n the ma5ority of cases< it is
also impossible to open the eyes. 4rom a scientific point of 9iew<
this is a case of an abrupt< unnatural interruption of the rapid eye
mo9ement :RM; phase of sleep< during which this paralysis is
always present< and it can persist for some time after the phase is
interrupted.
This is where it gets interesting. People in the physical
world are accustomed to an important rule? if you wish to achie9e
something< then do it< and do it as acti9ely as possible. This rule<
though good< is not always applicable to certain conditions linked
to the phase< and applies least of all to e1iting the phase.
!ometimes e1treme effort makes it possible to break through
sleep paralysis and resume mo9ement< though most of these
efforts tend to e1acerbate immobility.
*ue to the unusual nature of a negati9e situation following
a deliberate< fear0induced return to the body< the depth of the
phase may greatly increase because of the body8s natural<
11(
protecti9e inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral
corte1@ this results in e9en greater agitation< greater fear. The
paralysis grows stronger. This is a 9icious circle that leads to
unpleasant feelings and emotions< which may e9aporate any
desire to practice the phase.
&gnorance of correct procedures has led to the widespread
opinion that such ad9erse situations may make it impossible to
come back from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is<
therefore< dangerous to get in9ol9ed with the practice. =owe9er<
the solution to this problem rests in 9ery simple actions and
procedures that can pre9ent a large number of negati9e
e1periences?
%o7plete Rela>atio"
&n the section on deepening and maintaining< it was noted
that the more acti9e a practitioner is while in the phase< the better.
"on9ersely< if there is less acti9ity< the 'uality of the phase
declines< allowing for an easy e1it. Thus< in order to lea9e the
phase< the practitioner only needs to completely rela1 and ignore
any percei9ed sensations< actions< or thoughts. 6 practitioner may
also recite a prayer< mantra< or rhyme< since that helps the
consciousness to be distracted from the situation more 'uickly. Of
course< one needs to calm down and try to get rid of the fear<
which in and of itself is capable of keeping such a state going.
Periodically< the practitioner should try to mo9e a finger in order
to check whether attempts at rela1ation ha9e had an effect.
%o"ce"tratio" o" a Fi"#er
6 practitioner e1periencing sleep paralysis should try
mo9ing a finger or a toe. 6t first this won8t work< but the
practitioner has to concentrate precise thought and effort on the
action. 6fter a little while< the physical finger will begin to mo9e.
The problem with this techni'ue is that the practitioner may
accidentally start making phantom motions instead of physical
mo9ements< which is why an understanding of the difference
between the two sensations is necessary< since it is often not 9ery
ob9ious.
113
%o"ce"tratio" o" Po$$ible )ove7e"t$
The physiology of sleep paralysis< the phase state< and
dreams are such that when the practitioner is in one of these
states< some actions are always associated with mo9ements made
in the real body. This is true when mo9ing the eyeballs< the
tongue< or while breathing. &f the practitioner concentrates
attention on these processes< it is possible counteract inhibitions
to physical mo9ement@ as a result< a sleep0paraly>ed practitioner
will become able to mo9e in reality.
Reevaluati"# the Situatio"
7nder normal circumstances< deliberate e1it from the
phase is not the norm. *eliberate e1it is commonly caused by
certain fears and pre5udices. &f a practitioner is not able to acti9ate
the body using other emergency return techni'ues< a careful
consideration the possibilities offered by the phase is
recommended. There are many interesting and useful things that
can be e1perienced in the phase. ,hy ruin the possibility of great
opportunity because of a baseless fearJ
To be fair< it must be noted that emergency e1it techni'ues
do not always work. 6s a rule< after a long period of sleep
depri9ation< or at the beginning of or in the middle of a night8s
sleep< the urge to sleep is so great that it is difficult to resist the
sleep paralysis phenomenon. &n this respect< ree9aluating the
situation is highly recommended so that a practitioner is able to
take ad9antage of the situation 9ersus suffering by it. !leep
paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state by means of
By the $ay, %no$ing ho$ to e,it paralysis is i#portant not
only for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs
even $ithout the phase for appro,i#ately one-third of the hu#an
population at least once in a lifeti#e) +t usually happens "efore or
after sleep)
FIG'TI(G FEAR
4ear in the phase is a 9ery common occurrence. The
practitioner may e1perience fear at any stage< although it is
11.
e1pressed much more clearly during initial practice. The causes of
fear are 9ery di9erse? a feeling that returning to the body is
impossible@ a fear of death@ worrying that something bad is going
to happen to the body@ encountering something scary and terrible
in the phase@ painful sensations@ o9erly sharp< hyper0realistic
sensations. One fear dominates all others? the instinct of self0
preser9ation< which< without any apparent reason< can induce a
feeling of absolute horror # a feeling that cannot be e1plained or
controlled.
4or a no9ice stricken by insurmountable fear that causes
paralysis< there is only one way to gradually o9ercome. ach time
a no9ice enters the phase< an attempt should be made to go a step
further than the pre9ious time. 4or e1ample< in spite of feeling
terrified< the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then
mo9e them back to the initial position. The second time< the
practitioner should attempt to sit down. The third time< standing
up should be attempted. The fourth time< walking around in the
phase is ad9ised. Then< after incremental steps toward
e1periencing the harmlessness of the phase state< producti9e< calm
action may ensue.
Interesting fact!
Fear itself can "e used to enter
the phase and re#ain there for a long
ti#e) Once fears are allayed, a cal#ed
practitioner is e,periences increased
difficulty $ith entry into the phase)

4or a practitioner who faces periodical fears< reali>ing that
there is no real danger encourages progress in practice. 7rges to
rapidly return to the body are then made baseless. !ooner or later<
calmer thought dominates e9ents in the phase< and fear happens
less often.
,hen dealing with momentary fear caused by e9ents in
the phase< the simplest solution is to tackle it head0on and follow
through to the end in order to a9oid a fear0dri9en precedent. &f a
practitioner always runs away from undesirable e9ents< the e9ents
will occur more and more fre'uently. &f a practitioner is incapable
122
of facing fear in the phase< it is best to use the translocation
techni'ue to tra9el elsewhere< although this solution only
produces temporary relief.
%REATIO( OF 3ISIO(
Fision is often a9ailable at the 9ery beginning of a phase<
especially when the practitioner uses image obser9ation and
9isuali>ation techni'ues to enter. !ometimes 9ision appears
within the first few seconds. Other times< it manifests during the
deepening process. =owe9er< there are cases where 9ision is not
a9ailable and must be created 'uickly< at any cost. Fision may
arri9e as soon as it is thought about< but if this does not occur< a
special techni'ue is necessary.
To create 9ision< a practitioner needs to bring the hands
four to si1 inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them
through the grayness or darkness. Peering aggressi9ely and
attenti9ely at the minute details of the palms will cause them to
appear< much like they are being de9eloped on Polaroid film.
6fter se9eral seconds< 9ision will become clear< and along with
the palms< the surroundings will also become 9isible.
7nder no circumstances should the physical eyelids be
opened. Fision will appear on its own and will not differ from
that of reality and the physical sensation of opened eyes will
emerge. &t is possible to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite
number of times< e9en without ha9ing opened them at all< since
the latter is not needed for creating 9ision. The physical eyelids
may be open only while e1periencing a 9ery deep phase. &n a
shallow phase< opening the eyes will cause a return to
wakefulness.
The practitioner must also keep in mind that 9ision should
only be created after a complete separation from the body and a
subse'uent translocation has been achie9ed. 6ttempting to 9iew
the hands during flight or while ho9ering in an unidentified space
leads to arbitrary translocation.
%O(TA%T WIT' ,I3I(G OBEE%TS
121
Two problems may surface while con9ersing with animate
ob5ects in the phase? silence or a return to the body. &n 9iew of the
fact that many phase applications are based on contact with
people for one purpose or another< it is necessary to understand
how to correctly manage contact with li9ing ob5ects.
&n order to a9oid a foul :e5ection from the phase into
reality;< the elementary rules of AmaintainingB must be obser9ed.
6cti9ely obser9ing the facial features or clothing of a person you
want to communicate with. ,hile communicating< the
practitioner should constantly rub the hands together or maintain
strong 9ibrations by straining the brain. Remember to perform the
techni'ues to a9oid becoming absorbed in communication.
6 more comple1 problem is o9ercoming the
communicati9e unresponsi9eness of ob5ects in the phase. &n many
cases< the speech of an ob5ect is blocked by the internal stress of
the practitioner. !ometimes the problem stems from an
e1pectation that an ob5ect will not be able to communicate in the
phase.
&t is important to treat the ob5ects in a calm manner. There
is no use trying to shout or beat the ob5ect to force
communication. On the contrary< it is much more effecti9e to treat
the ob5ect gently< without applying pressure. *o not peer at an
ob5ect8s mouth< e1pecting sounds to emerge. &t is better to look
elsewhere@ taking a passi9e interest in communication generally
yields the best results.
6s a rule< the first time that communication with a li9ing
ob5ect is successful< future attempts go unhindered.
"ommunication methods in the phase are should be no
different than those used in ordinary life? talking< facial
e1pressions< gesturing with the hands< body language. Telepathy
is not necessary.
REAI(G
Reading te1t in the phase may be accompanied by a
number of difficulties. 4irst< small print becomes illegible because
the affects of hyper0concentration may distort te1t. This problem
is sol9ed by using large0font te1tual sources of information. 4or
122
e1ample< the te1t of a normal book blurs when obser9ed too
attenti9ely< but the large font on the co9er of a book is easily read
since its si>e is sufficient for rapid reading without detailed
scrutiny.
The second problem encountered while reading in the
phase is when te1t is legible but is completely meaningless in
composition@ gibberish. This problem is sol9ed by turning o9er
the pages< looking for a readable message. &t is also possible to
find another copy or create it anew using the ob5ect0finding
techni'ues. The same applies to cases where the te1t is seen as a
set of incomprehensible symbols or signs.
,hile reading in the phase< the practitioner should not
forget about performing AmaintainingB techni'ues to pre9ent a
foul by becoming too rela1ed.

3IBRATIO(S
The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably
unusual sensation that may be used successfully to enter< deepen
or maintain the phase. &t is difficult to describe it better than the
sensation of a hea9y current passing through the entire body
without causing any pain. &t may also feel like the whole body is
contracting< or a tingling sensation similar to numbness. Most
often< the sensations are similar to high0fre'uency 9ibrations of
the body< which e1plains the origin of the term A9ibrationB.
&f the practitioner is not sure whether or not he
e1perienced 9ibrations< then there is a good method to sol9e his
problem? if he really did< he will not ha9e any doubts about it. &n
all other cases< when there are doubts and uncertainty< the
practitioner is definitely not dealing with 9ibrations< or is dealing
with another form thereof.
&f you ha9e e1perienced 9ibrations at least once< the
recollection of these sensations helps greatly during the
simultaneous application of indirect techni'ues. They are created<
supported and strengthened by straining the brain or tensing the
body without using the muscles. 4or 9ibrations to appear< it often
suffices merely to think about them. *uring the first e1perience<
one should e1periment with them for a while by rolling them
12)
around the body and its parts< as well as strengthening and
weakening them.
5o$ever, one should not thin% that the presence of
vi"rations is a necessary condition for "eing in the phase) Many
no9ices often stri9e not for the phase but for 9ibrations< after
which the former must supposedly follow. That should not be the
case. There are indeed specific techni'ues that make it possible to
get into the phase by creating 9ibrations< but in all other cases
they are not necessary and some practitioners may ne9er ha9e
them at all.
TE%'(I-.ES FOR TRA(S,O%ATI(G
T'RO.G' OBEE%TS
&n a deep phase< the properties of the surrounding
en9ironment become 9ery similar to the physical world. =owe9er<
it may sometimes be necessary to pass through a wall or
translocate to a9oid a physical barrier in the phase. There are two
basic options for passing through barriers like walls. 7sually<
mastering these re'uires se9eral attempts.
Interesting fact!
+f a practitioner concentrates on
the physical sensations associated $ith
passing through a $all, it is possi"le to
get stuc%) . practitioner #ay even
e,perience the feeling of o"structed
"reathing $hen this happens) .t such a
ti#e it is necessary to return to the "ody)
Rapid efocu$ed Pe"etratio"
Run or 5ump at a wall with a burning desire to penetrate it.
*on8t focus on the wall@ instead concentrate on the immediate
surroundings. *o not try to take anything from the current
location since this may impede a successful passage through the
wall.
12+
The %lo$ed Eye$ Tech"i2ue
,hen approaching a wall< the practitioner must close his
eyes and completely focus on a desire to pass through it while
imagining that the wall does not e1ist< or that it is transparent and
penetrable. !urface resistance should be pressed through<
continuing on with the aggressi9e desire and concentration.
F,IG'T
Taking flight in the phase is a simple matter of
remembering past dreams of flight. /othing needs to be tensed<
no word need to be said. 6ttempting flight with closed eyes
produces a high rate of success< but presents an increased
probability of inad9ertent translocation.
&f a flight attempt is unsuccessful< a practitioner may try
5umping from a high ele9ation or from a window. The natural
instinct of dream flight takes o9er and the fall becomes a
controlled flight. =owe9er< 5umping from windows or other
ele9ations is ad9isable only to practitioners with e1perience< since
no9ices may not always be able to determine whether they are in
the phase or in reality.
6nother way to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air
when 5umping up.
S.PER-ABI,ITIES
The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on
the ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the
physical world. &t is important to remember that only a
practitioner8s apprehension places limits on what may be done in
the phase.
4or e1ample< if a practitioner needs to get to a location 0
e9en 9ery far away 0 it may be reached by teleportation. &f an
ob5ect needs to be mo9ed from one side of the room to the other<
it may be mo9ed by telekinesis. One of the ma5or benefits of the
phase e1perience is unencumbered freedom of action.
To master unusual abilities< only a few phases need to be
spent in concentrated de9elopment of the methods.
125
Teleki"e$i$
&n order to learn telekinesis :mo9ing ob5ect by thought;<
the practitioner concentrate on an ob5ect while e1periencing a
deepened phase< and attempt to mo9e the ob5ect by thinking about
the mo9ement. The only re'uired action is aggressi9e
9isuali>ation of the ob5ect8s mo9ement. /o specific e1ternal
actions are re'uired. Telekinetic ability is inherent to e9ery
human being. &f attempts are unsuccessful at first< press on.
%efore too long< the full effect of the practitioner8s will yield
results. 7sing this ability helps to encourage a good phase
e1perience by pro9iding a tool for carrying out planned tasks.
Pyroki"e$i$
&gniting an ob5ect in the phase 5ust by staring at it re'uires
a strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob5ect. Performed
successfully< an ob5ect will smoke< distort< darken and then burst
into flames.
Telepathy
To de9elop telepathy in the phase< it is necessary to peer at
animate ob5ects while listening surrounding e1ternal and internal
sounds with the intention of hearing thoughts e1pressed by
thought. 9en e1perienced practitioners encounter difficulty
while de9eloping telepathy< but when successful< contact with
people in the phase is substantially simplified. 7sing telepathy<
discerning the thoughts of people< animals< and ob5ects is
possible. =owe9er< this should not be taken too seriously< since it
is merely the nature of the phase to simulate what is e1pected.

Tra"$7utatio"
Transforming an ob5ect8s form re'uires the techni'ue of
transmutation :refer to "hapter .;. &t should also be noted that if
the goal is not to con9ert something but rather to transform
oneself< then it is necessary to use the translocation techni'ues
:also described in "hapter .;< whereby attention has to be
concentrated not on the desired place but on the desired form.
=ere again there are no limitations apart from indi9idual courage
12-
and fantasy. &t is possible to become a butterfly or a dinosaur. &t is
possible to become a bird or a worm. &t8s e9en possible to become
a child or a person of the opposite se1. These are not simply
e1ternal changes< but real transmutations< within and without. &f a
practitioner becomes a butterfly< it accompanies the sensation of
ha9ing wings< many legs< and an unusual body. The practitioner
will intuiti9ely know how to control each part of this new body.
This is a superficial description of the transmutation e1perience<
which ob9iously defies a customary understanding of reality.
T'E I)PORTA(%E OF %O(FIE(%E
6 crucial factor in de9eloping phase abilities is self0
confidence in the ability to use the skills. &nitially< these abilities
are absent because the human brain< tuned in to ordinariness<
blocks confidence in the ability to do anything unusual. 6s soon
as strong confidence is reached in the performance of phase
abilities< all others become easy to achie9e.
6lthough confidence in phase abilities may grow strong<
practitioners should remain soundly aware that abilities in the
phase are limited to the phase. 6ttempting telekinesis<
pyrokinesis< or transmutation in the real world is a waste of time
and energy.

%O(TRO,,I(G PAI(
6long with all the positi9e e1periences and sensations that
may be en5oy in the phase< painful e1periences nature may also
manifest. Punching a wall in a deep phase state will cause the
same pain as if a wall had been struck in physical reality.
!ome actions in the phase may una9oidably cause
unpleasant feelings of pain@ therefore< it is necessary to know how
to a9oid painful actions. 4ocusing on an internal confidence that
pain will not result from an action will alle9iate the problem. 6
practitioner may e1periment with this type of focus by
pummeling a wall while resol9ing that there is no pain. &f the
e1periment succeeds< then obtaining the same result will ne9er
12(
again re'uire the same le9el of effort@ thinking that the phase is
painless will suffice.
)ORA, STA(ARS I( T'E P'ASE
4rom the 9ery beginning< it should be understood that the
moral compass of phase space has nothing in common with the
properties and laws in the physical world that promulgate reality.
The phase space seemingly imitates the physical world with all its
properties and functions only because we are used to percei9ing it
and are not e1pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules
apply only to the place where these ha9e been. &t does not make
sense to follow the same rules while in the phase.
The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in
the phase because some would be unacceptable< improper< or bad
in the real world. These are merely beha9ioral patterns that are
unfounded in the world of the phase< where e9erything operates
on the basis of entirely different laws.
The only moral rules that might e1ist in the phase are
those that the practitioner establishes. &f desired< complete<
unhindered freedom may be e1perienced.
ST.*I(G POSSIBI,ITIES A( SE(SATIO(S
/o9ice practitioners should not immediately rush towards
a single specific goal if long0term practice is desired. &t is better to
e1tensi9ely in9estigate the phase and its surroundings before
focusing on accomplishment. This will build intimacy with the
e1perience and allow unhindered entry and interaction with the
phase.
6s in reality< learning whate9er first re9eals itself is the
key to increasing and speciali>ing knowledge. 6 beginning
practitioner should at first en5oy the simple fact of actually being
in the phase< then lean its details and functions. Once inside the
phase< a practitioner should e1plore it< e1amining and interacting
with e9erything encountered.
=e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings
in the phase in order to fully understand how unusual the phase is
123
in its realism. 6 practitioner must e1perience mo9ement? walking<
running< 5umping< flying< falling< swimming. Test the sensations
of pain by striking a wall with a fist. The simplest way to
e1perience taste sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to
eat e9erything that you find there< at the same time not forgetting
to smell each item. ,alk through the walls< translocate< create
and handle ob5ects. 1plore. 6ll these actions are 9ery interesting
in and of themsel9es. The possibilities really are infinite.
=owe9er< only when they are well understood and thoroughly
e1plored can it be said that the practitioner really knows what the
phase is about.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES WIT' PRI)AR* S/I,,S
,hen trying to discern whether or not a phase is intact< a
5udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical
en9ironment. &n the phase< physical attributes are simulations.
=yper0concentrating on an ob5ect for too short a time while
trying to determine whether the surroundings are in the phase or
in the physical world.
*eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely when
the entire natural length of the phase should be taken ad9antage
of.
Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm< rela1ed action.
Refusal to practice the phase because of fear< though this
problem is temporary and resol9able.
Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this
fre'uently leads to a foul.
Premature attempts to create 9ision in the phase< whereas
separating from the body and deepening should occur.
1cessi9e haste while creating 9ision although in the ma5ority
of cases 9ision appears naturally.
,hile concentrating on the hands to create 9ision< doing so at
an e1cessi9e distance 9ersus the recommended four to si1 inches.
4orgetting about the techni'ues for AmaintainingB while in
contact with li9ing ob5ects.
12.
4orgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing 9ision when
translocating through walls or other solid ob5ects.
*esiring to do something superhuman in the phase without
the re'uired internal desire and confidence.
4ear of e1periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to
control it.
Obser9ing moral standards in the phase when they do not
apply.
6 tendency to immediately use the phase for something
practical instead of first thoroughly e1ploring and interacting with
the surroundings.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER D
-ue$tio"$
1. 6re there skills in the phase that must first be mastered
before the phase may be used to its full e1tentJ
2. &s it possible to understand whether a phase is intact by
attempting to flyJ
). =as a practitioner most likely gotten up in the phase or in
reality if there are doubts about thisJ
+. &s it sufficient to think about the body in order to return to
it< and is it only re'uired to return into the body in order to
control itJ
5. ,hich arm should be acti9ely and aggressi9ely mo9ed to
o9ercome sleep paralysisJ
-. &s it possible to tell 5okes to oneself to o9ercome sleep
paralysisJ
(. &s it possible to mo9e the physical eyes while in the phaseJ
3. ,hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be
o9ercomeJ
.. "an sleep paralysis occur without practicing the phaseJ
12. ,hat if fear is not addressed and con'ueredJ
11. &s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to
o9ercome fearJ
12. &s there cause for fear of anything in the phaseJ
1)2
1). 6t what point can 9ision be created in the phase by
opening the eyelids and not through the use of special
techni'uesJ
1+. ,hat would happen with an attempt to open the eyes after
sitting up in bed< i.e.< before becoming completely separated
from the phaseJ
15. ,hy may contact with li9ing ob5ects in the phase cause a
return to the bodyJ
1-. ,hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the
mouth of a talking ob5ectJ
1(. &n the phase< how 'uickly can small te1t be readJ
13. ,hich is easier to read in the phase? te1t in a newspaper or
te1t on a large billboardJ
1.. &s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te1t while
reading in the phaseJ
22. &s it possible to burst through a wall after running up to it
with the eyes shutJ
21. ,hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying
in the phaseJ
22. 6re there any e1trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in
the phaseJ
2). "an a practitioner transform into a ball while in the phaseJ
2+. =ow does pain in the phase differ from pain in the
physical worldJ
25. !hould a practitioner gi9e up a seat to an elderly person
while in the phaseJ
2-. *ue to moral considerations< what is prohibited in the
phaseJ
Ta$k$
1. *uring your ne1t phase session< walk around your home
in9estigating the rooms< kitchen< and bathroom in detail.
2. Dearn to pass through walls. "ompletely dedicate one long
phase e1perience to perfecting this skill.
). Dearn to fly in the phase.
+. ,hile in a deep phase< learn to control pain by hitting a
wall with your fist.
1)1
5. ,hile in the phase< learn telekinesis :the ability to mo9e
ob5ects by thought; and pyrokinesis :setting ob5ects on fire<
also performed by thought;.
-. *edicate a lengthy phase e1perience to an e1periment with
9ision? create it if it is not already a9ailable< and then shut
your eyes and recreate 9ision. *o this at least ten times o9er
the course of a single phase
(. $et ob5ects in the phase to start talking.
3. *edicate a long phase to searching for different kinds of
te1ts in order to e1periment with reading 9arious si>e fonts.
1)2
%hapter F - Tra"$locatio" a"d Fi"di"#
ObGect$
T'E ESSE(%E OF TRA(S,O%ATIO(
A( FI(I(G OBEE%TS
Dike e9eryday reality< the phase space cannot be used for
certain purposes if it is not known how to mo9e around and find
necessary things. &n a wakeful state< it is more or less known
where something is located and how to reach it. &n the phase the
same assumptions cannot apply since phase mechanisms work by
different principles.
The reason for addressing translocation and finding
ob5ects in the same chapter is because both techni'ues rely on the
same mechanics that make the e1istence of these techni'ues
possible. &n other words< the same methods 0 with minor
e1ceptions 0 can be applied to both translocation and finding.
6fter studying the techni'ues described in this chapter< a
practitioner in the phase will be able to go to any location and
find any ob5ect. The only limitations that e1ist are those of the
imagination and desire@ if these are unlimited< so are the
possibilities.
Regarding translocation< attention should not be focused
on methods for tra9elling through nearby spaces. 4or e1ample< a
practitioner may simply walk into an ad5acent room< or out to the
street 9ia the corridor or through the window. These are natural<
easy actions. 6 practitioner should instead concentrate attention
on how to mo9e to remote destinations that cannot be 'uickly
reached by physical means.
&t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures
for translocation. !ometimes< due to a lack of e1perience< a
practitioner may mistake the phase for reality< and reality may be
1))
mistaken for the phase. Mistaking the phase for reality implies no
danger since a practitioner simply belie9es that an entry attempt
was unsuccessful. =owe9er< if reality is mistaken for the phase< a
practitioner may perform dangerous or e9en life0threatening
actions. 4or e1ample< after getting out of bed in a wakeful state<
thinking that e9erything is happening in the phase< a beginner
may approach a window and 5ump out of it< e1pecting to fly< as is
customary in the phase. 4or this reason alone< shortcuts to flight
should only be taken after gaining a le9el of e1perience that
makes it possible to unambiguously distinguish the phase from a
wakeful state.
&f a glitch occurs when practicing translocation techni'ues
:for e1ample< landing in the wrong place;< a practitioner should
simply repeat the techni'ue until the desired result is obtained.
ither way< initial training is a must in order to make e9erything
easier for you later on.
6s far as ob5ect0finding techni'ues are concerned< these
are used for both inanimate and animate ob5ects. &n other words<
these techni'ues are e'ually effecti9e for finding< for e1ample< a
person or a utensil. =owe9er< there are se9eral techni'ues that are
only suitable for finding li9ing ob5ects.
BASI% PROPERT* OF T'E P'ASE SPA%E
6ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a
primary law? the degree of changeability of the phase space is
in9ersely proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability
of its ob5ects. That is< the deeper and more stable the phase< the
more difficult it is to perform something unusual in it because in a
deep< stable phase< the laws of it begin to closely resemble those
of the physical world.
1)+

6ll translocation and finding ob5ects techni'ues are based
on the knowledge of methods that bypass the primary law. The
secret lies in the fact that not only phase depth affects the
controllability of the phase< but so does phase stability< which in
turn depends to a large e1tent on the number of sensations
e1perienced in the phase. The techni'ues for translocation and
finding ob5ects are used when these e1perienced sensations are
weakened through certain actions.
&n other words< if a practitioner located in the phase holds
a red pencil and e1amines it< tactile and 9isual perceptions are
engaged< which under sharp agitation cause the ob5ect to e1ist in
its complete form. =owe9er< as soon as the eyes are shut< the
stability of pencil image weakens. &n this situation< it will be
enough for the practitioner :after sufficient training; to
concentrate on belie9ing that the pencil is dark0blue in order for it
to appear dark blue after opening the eyes. This phenomenon
occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer determined by
perceptual areas of the brain and< therefore< it is possible to
change it.
&f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitioner8s
eyes are shut< and there is concentration on a thought that the
pencil is no longer on the table< then after opening the eyes< the
1)5
practitioner will find that the pencil has disappeared. &n essence<
when the pencil is lying on the table and the practitioner8s eyes
are closed< and the pencil is not being held< no perception is being
in9ested in the pencil< which the practitioner deletes using
autosuggestion.
7sing certain techni'ue0related methods< a practitioner
may cause the stability of the phase state to remain in flu1 using
techni'ues that best suit the practitioner8s indi9idual personality.
TE%'(I-.ES FOR TRA(S,O%ATIO(
Tra"$locatio" throu#h Teleportatio"
This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni'ues
that beginners should use right away. To apply it< shut the eyes :if
9ision is present;< and then concentrate attention on a thought0
form or image of a location elsewhere in the phase. 6t this
moment< there will be a string sensation of swift flight and within
two to 12 seconds< the destination will be reached.
The success of this techni'ue depends on a strong
concentration upon a single goal? the desired location. Practice
must be performed 9ery clearly< confidently< aggressi9ely< and
without distractions. 6ny unrelated thoughts ha9e a profoundly
negati9e influence on the performance of this techni'ue. They
unnecessarily prolong the flight< cause a foul< or result in arri9ing
at an undesired location.
1)-
Tra"$locatio" throu#h a oor
&n order to use this techni'ue< approach any door with the
strong belief that it leads to the re'uired location. 6fter opening
the door< the practitioner will see and be able to step into the
destination. &f the door was originally open< it must be completely
shut before applying the techni'ue.
6 drawback to this techni'ue is that its practice always
re'uires a door. &f there is no door< users of this translocation
techni'ue should create one using an ob5ect finding techni'ue.
Tra"$locatio" throu#h Teleportatio" 9ith the Eye$
Ope"
This techni'ue is difficult because it re'uires an unstable
phase space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another
location. *uring teleportation by teleportation with eyes shut< the
practitioner disengages from the current location. ,hereas during
teleportation by flight with eyes shut the practitioner disentangles
himself from the current location< that is not the case here.
Therefore< this techni'ue should be used only by e1perienced
practitioners who are confident that they are capable of remaining
in the phase.
6s far as implementing the techni'ue is concerned< the
practitioner simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought
that he is already present in the desirable location and focus on its
image. &t is important to not stare at or touch anything during the
thought. !urrounding space will dim< blur and then disappear
during this time< and then the intended location will gradually
start to appear. The rate of space metamorphosis depends on the
degree of desire to reach the re'uired location.
&f concentration is weak or phase depth is poor< then after
space destabili>es< it may not be restored 0 and a return to the
wakeful state will occur.
Tra"$locatio" 9ith %lo$ed Eye$
This is one of the easiest techni'ues. To use this
techni'ue< the practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha9e
an intense desire that< when the eyes are ne1t opened< the re'uired
1)(
location will be reached. &n order to considerably increase the
effecti9eness of this techni'ue< it would be useful to imagine< at
the moment you close your eyes< that you ha9e already reached
the desired location. Translocation must occur then< and it has to
happen without the flight sensations that occur during
teleportation with closed eyes. Translocation must occur right
then< and it has to happen without the flight that occurs in
teleportation with closed eyes< which must be a9oided.
Tra"$locatio" by %o"ce"tratio" o" a Re7ote ObGect
To perform this techni'ue< the practitioner should peer
from a distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The
greater an intention to see an ob5ect8s detail< the 'uicker the
arri9al at the ob5ect8s location.
6 drawback to this techni'ue is that this type of
translocation is possible only for places that are already 9isible<
albeit from a great distance.
Tra"$locatio" duri"# Separatio"
The simplest way to translocate is to do so while
separating from the body. mploying this techni'ue is e1tremely
simple and 9ery con9enient. &t may be combined with almost any
separation techni'ue and is performed by focusing on the image
and feel of a desired location during the initial stages of e1iting
the body. &t is e9en better to imagine that phase entry will occur
and separation will complete in a chosen location.
Interesting fact!
.fter having changed his place of
residence, the practitioner $ill very
often continue for so#e ti#e to separate
fro# the "ody in the sa#e house $here
he $as used to doing this previously)
6 drawback of this techni'ue is that separation occurs
only in the beginning of the phase e1perience and< therefore< can
only be used once. Other options should be considered after the
first translocation.
1)3
Tra"$locatio" by Pa$$i"# throu#h a Wall
This techni'ue is performed by walking or flying through
a wall with the eyes shut and a firm con9iction that the re'uired
location is behind the wall. The barrier does not necessarily ha9e
to be a wall. &t can be any non0transparent ob5ect through which a
practitioner may walk or fly? a screen< a wardrobe< and so on.
The main drawback of this techni'ue is the necessity of
appropriate skills for penetrating through solid ob5ects of the
phase. 6nother necessary condition for applying this techni'ue is
the presence of barriers to pass through.
Tra"$locatio" throu#h ivi"#
This techni'ue is identical to passing through walls with
the only difference being instead of a wall 0 which may not
always be a9ailable 0 the practitioner will use the floor or the
ground. The practitioner must di9e headfirst with the eyes shut
and ha9e complete confidence that the re'uired location is
underneath the solid surface. The ability to pass through solid
ob5ects is< naturally< also re'uired.
6 practitioner may di9e through the floor or the ground<
and also into any flat hori>ontal surface? a table< a chair< a bed<
and so forth.
Tra"$locatio" throu#h Rotatio"
6pply this techni'ue< a practitioner in the phase will to
start rotating on an a1is while simultaneously concentrating on a
belief that a desired location will be reached once rotation is
stopped. The eyes must be shut during the rotation< or 9ision must
not be focused on anything in particular. 6s a rule< two to fi9e
re9olutions on an a1is are sufficient. Once again< e9erything
depends on the ability to fully concentrate on a desired goal
without any distractions.
OBEE%T FI(I(G TE%'(I-.ES
Tech"i2ue of Tra"$locatio"
1).
6ll translocation techni'ues are also applicable to ob5ect
finding techni'ues since the use of both techni'ues re'uires
altering the surrounding the space. &nstead of concentrating on a
location< the practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a
space that is to be found or changed. 6s a result< finding the
necessary ob5ect :pro9ided this techni'ue has been mastered; is
guaranteed< but maintaining the original location where the action
begins is not guaranteed.
&f the goal is to find an ob5ect while remaining in the
present location< use the speciali>ed techni'ues described later on?
techni'ues that change only a portion of the phase space.
Fi"di"# by %alli"# a (a7e
This techni'ue is only used to find li9ing ob5ects. The
practitioner must call a person or an animal by name to cause the
animate phase resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should
be loud< nearly a shout< otherwise it will not always work.
$enerally< it is often enough to pronounce a name se9eral times to
achie9e results.
&f the desired animate ob5ect does not ha9e a name or the
practitioner does not know it< then any name or general
summoning will do< like< A"ome hereMB This should be done
while mentally focusing on a clear image of the desired person or
animal.
Fi"di"# by I"2uiry
To perform this techni'ue< approach any person in the
phase and ask him :or her; where to 'uickly find a desired ob5ect.
6n accurate answer is usually gi9en straight away< and it should
be followed. =owe9er< to a9oid wasting time< do not forget to
mention that the ob5ect must be found A'uicklyB< or specify that
the ob5ect should be AnearbyB. *uring this communication< under
no circumstances should there be a doubt about the accuracy of
the information< since otherwise it may lead to a simulation of
what is e1pected.
The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the
presence of an animate person and good skill at communicating
with ob5ects in the phase< which can pro9e difficult.
1+2
Fi"di"# by Tur"i"# Arou"d
&n order to use this techni'ue< the practitioner must
concentrate and imagine that the re'uired ob5ect is located
somewhere behind his back< and after turning around he will
actually see it there< e9en if it was not there 5ust a moment earlier.
This works best if the practitioner< prior to turning around< did not
9iew the place where the ob5ect is e1pected to appear.
Fi"di"# Arou"d a %or"er
,hen approaching any corner< concentrate and imagine
the re'uired ob5ect is 5ust around the corner. Then< after turning
the corner< the ob5ect will be found. 6nything that limits space
9isibility may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha9e to be
the corner of a house or another type of building@ it could be the
corner of a wardrobe< the corner of a truck< etc.
The drawback of this techni'ue is that it re'uires the
a9ailability of a sufficiently large corner that blocks the 9iew of
anything around the other side of it.
Fi"di"# i" the 'a"d
This techni'ue is< in essence< only applicable to finding
ob5ects that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this
techni'ue< concentrate on the idea that the ob5ect is already in
hand. 6t that moment< the practitioner must not look at it. !oon
after beginning to concentrate on this idea< the practitioner will at
first feel a slight sensation of the ob5ect lying in his hand<
followed by a full sensation and appearance of the desired ob5ect.
Fi"di"# by Tra"$7utatio"
This techni'ue distorts the phase space while not
completely disengaging a perception of the space. The
practitioner must gi9e strong attention to a thought that a re'uired
ob5ect is going to appear in a desired location. There must be
sufficient confidence that the practitioner8s desires will be
reali>ed. 6t this moment< the process of metamorphosis will
begin? space will distort and dim< and the re'uired ob5ect will
begin to manifest itself. 6fter this< brightness and focus will be
1+1
restored with necessary alterations made present in the phase
space.
This techni'ue is relati9ely difficult to perform in
comparison to others< and< therefore< it is better to use it only after
a high le9el of e1perience has been reached because it is difficult
to remain in the phase during any metamorphic process.
6s is e9ident in the name of this techni'ue< it can be used
to find ob5ects and also create new ob5ects from found ob5ects.

T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES WIT' TRA(S,O%ATIO(
A( FI(I(G OBEE%TS
6pplying translocation and ob5ect finding techni'ues without
the precondition of a steady phase.
&nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra9el to a location or
to find an ob5ect.
*oubting that results will be achie9ed instead of ha9ing
complete confidence.
Passi9e performance of the techni'ues instead of a strong
desire and high le9el of aggression.
4orgetting to repeat translocation or ob5ect finding techni'ues
when the techni'ue did not work or worked incorrectly during the
first attempt.
$etting distracted by e1traneous thoughts during the lengthy
process of teleporting with eyes shut. Total concentration is
re'uired at all times.
6pplying the techni'ue of teleportation with eyes open
without ade'uate e1perience.
4ailing to immediately translocate when using the closed eyes
techni'ue@ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni'ue.
$lossing o9er minute details or only obser9ing the broad
features of a remote ob5ect while applying translocation by
concentration.
6 delayed desire to mo9e while translocating during
separation. 6n instantaneous desire to immediately mo9e is
necessary.
1+2
4orgetting to first shut a door completely when using
translocation through a door@ otherwise< there will be contact with
what is already behind it.
7sing a translocation techni'ue to go through a wall without
knowing how to pass through solid ob5ects.
Paying too much attention to the process of translocation
through a wall@ this leads to being trapped in the wall.
4orgetting to shut the eyes while translocating di9ing
headfirst. The eyes should remain closed until after the techni'ue
is complete.
&nsufficient internal association with an animate ob5ect while
finding it by calling its name.
Trying to find an ob5ect 9ia interrogation instead of passi9ely
communicating with li9ing ob5ects of the phase.
7sing distant corners when applying the techni'ue of finding
an ob5ect around the corner. "hoose nearby corners to a9oid
wasting precious tra9el time.
6pplying transmutation techni'ues without possessing
sufficient e1perience in managing :AmaintainingB; the phase
space.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER F
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to translocate in
the phaseJ
2. ,hat becomes possible with the ability to find ob5ects in
the phaseJ
). ,hat do translocation and finding ob5ects techni'ues ha9e
in commonJ
+. ,hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by
translocation and finding ob5ectsJ
5. =ow may one translocate across 9ery short distancesJ
-. ,hen the flight techni'ue by 5umping out of a window be
attemptedJ
1+)
(. ,hat should be done if translocation and ob5ect finding
techni'ues do not yield the re'uired resultJ
3. &s it possible to find a person from real life using the
techni'ue of finding ob5ectsJ
.. *oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phaseJ
12. ,hat are the fundamental components of space and ob5ect
stabilityJ
11. =ow large is the role of auditory perception in the stability
of spaceJ
12. ,hat is most important while using a teleportation
techni'ueJ
1). ,hat does speed of mo9ement depend on during
teleportationJ
1+. !hould a no9ice apply the techni'ue of teleportation with
open eyesJ
15. ,hat techni'ue might the translocation with closed eyes
techni'ue turn intoJ
1-. !hould large or small details be scrutini>ed while
translocating by concentration on remote ob5ectsJ
1(. &s the techni'ue of translocation during separation applied
after separation or while beginning to separateJ
13. ,hen applying the techni'ue of translocation through a
door? is it better if the door is open or closedJ
1.. ,hy might translocation by passing through a wall failJ
22. ,hen using translocation by di9ing< is it important to be
in a place where there is something to stand onJ
21. ,hile applying the techni'ue of rotation< should rotation
be imagined or realJ
22. &s it possible to use a translocation techni'ue to attempt
finding ob5ectsJ
2). ,hen using the techni'ue of calling by name< what should
be done if the name of a desired person in the phase is
unknownJ
2+. ,hile looking for an ob5ect using the method of in'uiry< is
it important to specify that the ob5ect needs to be found
A'uicklyBJ
25. =ow far back must a turn occur when the techni'ue of
finding ob5ects by turning is being usedJ
1++
2-. ,ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the
techni'ue of finding ob5ects around the cornerJ
2(. &s it necessary to shut the eyes while using the
transmutation techni'ueJ
Ta$k$
1. *edicate the ne1t three phases to e1periments with
translocation techni'ues< using all of them and tra9elling
where9er you want.
2. 6fter e1periencing three phases dedicated to translocation<
select the techni'ues that work best for you.
). *uring the ne1t phase< tra9el to the iffel Tower< to the
Moon< and to the homes of some of your relati9es.
+. *edicate the ne1t three phases to e1periments with the full
range of techni'ues for finding ob5ects< including
translocation techni'ues.
5. 6fter three phases dedicated to finding ob5ects< select the
techni'ues that you are most comfortable with.
-. &n the ne1t phase that you e1perience< find your mother<
and then at the same location locate this te1tbook< a red globe<
and a green rose.
1+5
%hapter !H - Applicatio"
(ou have in front of you a concise description of the
phase-s practical applications, al"eit in condensed for# as full
treat#ent of the topic re9uires #uch #ore than a single chapter)
. #uch #ore detailed description of $ays to practically apply the
phase, along $ith techni9ues for doing so, are contained in the
"oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212
Transfor#ation*) +t also provides #any e,a#ples of the
pheno#enon in practice)
T'E ESSE(%E OF APP,I%ATIO(S
FOR P'ASE STATES
Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and
9ariety of e1perience that the practitioner is often not concerned
with the 'uestion of how the phase might be purposefully used.
The critical 'uestion of application becomes e9en more critical as
e1perience increases. 6pplication of the phase becomes more
9i9id against the background of understanding how the
phenomenon can pro9ide a means of gaining information and new
e1periences.
!ome approach the phase practice with a predetermined
goal< uninterested in anything else. ,ith a specific goal< a
problem may arise in the origination of the goal because the phase
phenomenon is wrapped in a thick layer of pre5udices and
stereotypes< which often ha9e no bearing on the reality. The
primary purpose of this chapter is to precisely separate reality
from fiction. &ts second purpose is to pro9ide a detailed
description of what may be obtained from the practice of phase
e1periences.
1+-
9ery pro9en and accessible practical application of the
phase is based on three 'ualities? a; application founded on the
phase8s ability to simulate any ob5ect and any space with any
properties and functions@ b; application based on the opportunity
to connect with the subconscious mind in order to obtain
information@ c; application based on the phase8s ability to impact
a practitioner8s physiology.
Most importantly< nothing described in this chapter is
difficult to achie9e. 6ny application may be achie9ed during the
9ery first phase if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the
appropriate techni'ues for translocation or finding ob5ects.
Regardless of whether the practitioner adheres to a mystical or
pragmatic world9iew< a full range of access is inherently possible.
Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e1ceed
the scope of descriptions related through this chapter. &t is
possible that other applications simply ha9e not been pro9en yet<
and< so far< the correct methods of practicing these unknown.
Only the practitioner may determine the limits of possibility
within the phase. Of course< common sense should be applied< or
it would be logically and psychologically difficult to disengage
misconceptions. The goal of this chapter is to provide a real
Cthough #ini#al0 foundation that is fir# and unyielding,
$hatever the circu#stance) +f the practitioner follo$s a strict
approach to practice, it $ill "e #uch #ore difficult to "eco#e
lost during further practical and theoretical studies)
APP,I%ATIO(S BASE O( SI).,ATIO(
Many wonder about the nature of the phase state in
relation to the brain< i.e. whether or not the phase is all in one8s
head. %ut in the conte1t of applying the phase< this is not a 9alid
concern. Perception of the entire physical en9ironment is
performed through sensory organs. &n the phase< perception is the
same< sometimes e9en more realistic. ,hether e9erything
described in this chapter occurs in reality or is merely simulated
makes no difference in terms of the encountered sensations.
Travelli"#
1+(
.round the $orld/ &t is possible to reach any point of the
planet< and it is particularly interesting to re9isit places where the
practitioner once li9ed or 9isited< and 9isit places that the
practitioner has a strong desire to 9isit. 9ery sight and beauty of
the arth become accessible< be it the iffel Tower or an island in
Oceania< the Pyramids of gypt< or 6ngel 4alls.
Through Outer Space? 6lthough humankind is not going
to reach Mars any time soon< any practitioner may stand on its
surface and e1perience its uni'ue landscape through the use of
translocation in the phase. There is nothing more ama>ing than
obser9ing gala1ies and nebulae< planets< and stars from the
9antage pint of 9ast space. Of all phase applications a9ailable< this
one pro9ides practitioners with the most striking aesthetic
e1periences.
To different places in ti#e/ This makes it possible to 9isit
a childhood< to see what a person will look like in the future@ a
pregnant woman in the phase may see what her child will look
like. Tra9el far back in time and witness the construction of the
Pyramids at $i>a< see Paris in the 1(th century< wander among
the dinosaurs of the Lurassic period.
Through different $orlds/ Tra9el a world that has been
described in literature or 5ust in9ented by the practitioner<
de9eloped in the imagination. These could be e1traterrestrial
ci9ili>ations< parallel worlds< or uni9erses from fairy tales and
films. 6ny destination is nearby.
E"cou"ter$
:ith relatives/ !ince relati9es cannot always see each
other< there is the remarkable possibility to meet each other and
talk in the phase. Of course< this does not entail mutual presence.
&t is enough for one person to possess the re'uired desire 0 the
second person may ne9er e9en know. Reali>ing the desire to
contact a close relati9e and e1change information is a treasure.
:ith ac9uaintances/ "ircumstances often pre9ent seeing
people who are important. This is an opportunity to reali>e a
desire and finally meet that certain person again.
1+3
:ith the dead/ Regardless of the nature of the phase
phenomenon< nothing else yields the possibility to see< talk to<
and embrace a deceased lo9ed one. These are 9i9id< personal
e1periences< accessible to e9eryone< and achie9ing these
encounters does not re'uire ma5or difficulty. "ourage is the only
necessity. 4rom a techni'ue0related point of 9iew< a stable phase
and application of the finding ob5ects techni'ue sets the stage for
what at first may seem impossible. &t should be noted that when a
deceased person is encountered in the phase< the distortions
caused by the ob5ect finding techni'ue may lead to some 9ery
undesirable occurrences. &f you are interested in this sub5ect< you
should carefully study the guidebook ?ontact $ith the 8eceased
:author? Michael Raduga;.
:ith cele"rities/ Through the use of ob5ect finding
techni'ues< a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous
person. This could be a historical persona< a contemporary
politician< or an artist. &n the phase state< they are all accessible
for any type of interaction. 4or e1ample< a practitioner could meet
Lulius "aesar< Lesus "hrist< /apoleon< "hurchill< !talin< =itler<
l9is Presley< Marilyn Monroe< and a great many others.
Reali=i"# e$ire$
9eryone has dreams. Regardless of whether they e9er
come true in reality< they may at least en5oy be reali>ed in the
phase. !ome dream of a 9isit to Das Fegas< some to dri9e a
4errari< some 9isit Outer !pace< others would like to bathe in a
pile of money< and some desire se1ual e1periences. 6ll of these
may finally be e1perienced in the phase.
Alter"ative to the 3irtual World
&n the phase< young men may participate in game battles
as if the battles are real. 6 practitioner can 9isit unusual worlds
and places while en5oying completely realistic sensations< feel a
weapon in his hands< and e9en the smell of gunpowder. &f desired<
e9en the sensation of battle wounds may be e1perienced. $aming
possibilities in the phase are not limited by the power of a
microprocessor< but the e1tent of a practitioner8s imagination.
1+.
%reative evelop7e"t
?reating $or%s of art/ 7sing the methods of ob5ect
finding or translocation< an artistic practitioner can purposefully
seek an ob5ect in the phase that may be composed in real life. &f
necessary< it is possible to easily return to study an ob5ect in the
phase. 4or e1ample< a painter may find a stunning landscape and
puts it to can9as in the real world while periodically returning to
the same landscape in the phase.
Gie$ing future co#pleted $or%s of art/ &f an artist is in the
process of reali>ing an idea< then a preliminarily look at the end
result of a design may be seen in the phase. 6 painter can
e1amine a painting in ad9ance@ a sculptor may see a completed
sculpture< and an architect will be able to wander through a house
that is still in the early stages of design. 6ny creati9e work can be
simulated in the phase.
. source of inspiration and fantasy/ The phase practice
imparts ideas and desires that positi9ely affect creati9e endea9ors.
4urthermore< the reali>ation of desires and tra9els through
unusual spaces e9oke great emotions< which pro9ide e1cellent
inspiration.
APP,I%ATIO(S BASE O( %O(TA%T
WIT' T'E S.B%O(S%IO.S )I(
6ssume that the phase state is 5ust an e1ceptionally
unusual state of brain and that perception within it is no more than
an unusually realistic play of its functions. 6ssume that a
practitioner in the phase decides to tra9el to a forest. To do so< the
translocation with closed eyes techni'ue is used< and< as a result< a
forest appears.
,hat happens if the 9ision contains 9ery detailed
knowledge of forests< what forests consist of< and where forests
originateJ The brain creates a hyper0realistic space superior to
that of e9eryday reality< consisting of millions of blades of grass<
lea9es< hundreds of trees< and a multitude of sounds. ach blade
of grass has depth and build< not 5ust a point. ach leaf also
consists of component parts. 6 uni'ue< natural pattern makes up
the bark of each tree.
152
!uddenly< a wind begins to blow through the forest< and
millions of lea9es and blades of grass< following a mathematical
model of the propagation of air masses< begin oscillating in a
wa9elike fashion. Thus< a certain resource inside us is capable in
mere seconds not only of creating millions of details in the
desired scene< but also to control each of those details
indi9iduallyM
9en if the phase is 5ust a state of mind< this does not
mean that there are no sources of information within it. The mind
possesses great computing ability and is e'uipped to imagine the
full e1tent of the impossible. /o computer< howe9er powerful< is
capable of similar feats. 6 practitioner is able to somehow tap
into ama>ing resources while in the phase. &t only remains to learn
e1actly how to achie9e mastery.
&t is possible that the phase space is go9erned by the
subconscious mind. This means that the practitioner is able to
contact the subconscious while in the phase state. *uring
e9eryday life< the subconscious mind sends information based on
calculations determined by enormous capabilities. =owe9er<
humans neither hear nor percei9e these signals because people are
accustomed to recei9ing information linguistically. The
subconscious mind hardly operates within the limitations of
language. "ommunication with the subconscious mind on a
conscious le9el is only possible within the phase. &f all phase
ob5ects are created and controlled by the subconscious mind< then
it is possible to use them as translators. 4or e1ample< when
talking to a person in the phase< normal words are heard while the
ob5ect and communicated information is controlled by the
subconscious mind.
6n e1planation of how information is obtained in the
phase can hardly be une'ui9ocally pro9en. Perhaps there are other
undisco9ered resources. %ut that is not so important. The most
important thing is definitely known? how to obtain information in
the phase.
The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is
not comple1. 6fter entering the phase< only the techni'ues for
obtaining information and the methods of 9erifying it need to be
learned to increase in knowledge gleaned from the phase.
151
%ased on the pragmatic e1planation of the nature of the
phase as an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious<
it may be assumed that the amount of information obtained in the
phase is limited. &f the phase e1ists within the confines of the
brain< then the brain can only operate on data that has been
recei9ed by the brain o9er the course of its e1istence. &ndeed< it
appears that e9erything percei9ed through the sensory organs is
remembered and correlated with other data@ this obser9ation
concern conscious and unconscious perception.
&f any e9ent is actually a conse'uence of other e9ents<
which were< in turn< also conse'uences of pre9ious happenings<
then nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is known 0 then it
is possible to calculate what is implied by it.
6s a result< if e9erything is based solely on the resource of
the subconscious mind< then information may be obtained about
e9erything that is related to an indi9idual life? the practitioner8s
e1periences and the e1periences of those with whom the
practitioner e1periences life. Dessons are learned from the future
and past< and the future and past of others. 6ll in all< in order to
approach knowing the whole of the information a9ailable in the
phase< personal knowledge capacity would need to increase by
122 or e9en 1<222 times.
152
The only information that is not a9ailable in the phase is
that about which the subconscious mind does not ha9e any
preliminary information. 4or e1ample< where to purchase a
winning lottery ticket that will win millions of dollars cannot be
learned since there is no data that could support the necessary
calculation. The subconscious mind will also not be able to show
the practitioner what a random street in a small town on the other
end of the arth looks like. 6 practitioner should not try guessing
what information the subconscious mind has to offer and what it
doesn8t because mistakes are easily made. 4or e1ample< if a
practitioner has ne9er been to Paris and ne9er seen the iffel
Tower< it might be assumed that the practitioner8s subconscious
mind knows nothing about it either< although through o9er the
course of life< the mind has already recei9ed an enormous
'uantity of information from pictures< photographs< stories<
9ideos< books< and so forth.
There are three basic techni'ues for obtaining information
in the phase. ach of them has its ad9antages and disad9antages
that must be studied and learned before use.
A"i7ate ObGect$ Tech"i2ue;
To perform this method of obtaining information< the
practitioner< in a full deep phase< must locate a person by
techni'ues for finding ob5ects and procure the necessary
information from that person through the use of simple 'uestions.
&f the re'uired information is linked to a certain person< then that
person should be located in the phase. &f the information is not
related to anyone in particular< then it is possible to create a
uni9ersal information source< which must be associated with
wisdom and knowledge. 4or e1ample< this could be a wise
recluse< a well0known philosopher< or a guru.
The ad9antage of this techni'ue is that it is easy to pose
additional 'uestions and it is also easier to 9erify whate9er
information is obtained. 6 drawback of this techni'ue is that< for
many< it is difficult to communicate with li9ing ob5ects in the
phase because of ob5ects8 unresponsi9eness or a practitioner8s
problems with maintaining the phase while talking with ob5ects.
15)
I"a"i7ate ObGect$ Tech"i2ue;
7se techni'ues for finding ob5ects in order to locate
information from sources like inscriptions< books< or newspapers.
,hile trying to locate the source of information< remember to
concentrate of a belief that what is found will ha9e the desired
information. !ource types are not limited to paper media@ e9en
radios or tele9isions may be watched or listened to< and computer
search engines and file systems also may produce results.
6 huge drawback of this techni'ue is that considerable
complications arise if an additional or a follow0up 'uestion
emerges< which may cause the practitioner to ha9e to stop and
repeat the searching process.
The upside to this techni'ue is that if a practitioner has
problems communicating with animate ob5ects< this techni'ue can
temporarily ser9e as a reasonable alternati9e.
Epi$ode Tech"i2ue;
&n order to recei9e information using this method< imagine
an e9ent or series of e9ents that will communicate the desired
information. Then< mo9e to the area where predetermined e9ents
are e1pected to take place by using translocation techni'ues. 6fter
arri9ing at the destination< use 9isual obser9ation to understand
what is taking place and the information that the e9ents are
communicating. The episode techni'ue is suitable only for cases
where information can be obtained by obser9ation.

5o$ to verify the infor#ationH The techni'ues for
recei9ing information in the phase are not comple1 in and pro9e
successful after 5ust a few attempts. =owe9er< as was already
mentioned earlier< the properties of phase spaces that do not fall
under the category of 9i9id perception are not particularly stable 0
not only in terms of appearance< but also in terms of their
properties. "orrectness of information also depends on the ob5ects
themsel9es. The problem rests in that the practitioner may not be
able to properly control the ob5ect in 'uestion and may recei9e
false information.
Interesting fact!
15+
The phase space is not everyday
realityB therefore, it should not "e
treated $ith the nor#al "elief that every
o"servation should "e regarded as fact)
9en when a practitioner has learned to find animate and
inanimate ob5ects with an absence of doubt< there is still no
guarantee that the recei9ed information is always accurate. 6 few
techni'ue0related tricks are able to test an ob5ect8s ability to speak
the truth.
4or e1ample< an ob5ect can talk about something with
absolute confidence< but that does not mean that what it
communicates is all true. &f doubt is e1perienced while finding the
ob5ect< then doubt may ha9e an effect on what the ob5ect says.
This is why doubt must be a9oided at all costs 0 although
beginners are bound to initially ha9e problems with this.
To determine whether an ob5ect is able to gi9e accurate
information< a control 9uestion should be asked@ a 'uestion that
the subconscious mind cannot know the answer to. 4or e1ample< a
practitioner might ask a found ob5ect? A,here can & buy the
winning lottery ticket for the Mega %all 5ackpotJB &f the ob5ect
starts answering such 'uestions seriously< going into great detail<
then the ob5ect should be created anew since its properties allow
the possibility that it will lie. 6 proper ob5ect will remain silent or
say that it does not know the answer to the control 'uestion.
6fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a
control 'uestion< it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a
clarifying 9uestion. The practitioner needs to ask the ob5ect where
the information came from to find out the details that offer proof
of the information8s authenticity in the real world. The ob5ect may
also be asked the same 'uestions more than once< pro9ided they
are reworded. The answers to reworded 'uestions must be
identical.
Remember< the more important the nature of the
information and the more serious action it implies< the more effort
needs to be in9ested in 9erifying it in the real world since a
certain percentage of the information is bound to be incorrect
despite correct performance of information0related techni'ues.
155
APP,I%ATIO( BASE
O( I(F,.E(%I(G P'*SIO,OG*
There are three main elements that< with the help of the
phase< may influence the physiology in 9ery beneficial ways.
4irst< it is possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn how
to influence physiology. !econd< the brain reacts more strongly to
sensations than to real e9ents. 4or e1ample< if running while in
the phase< the physical processes of the body would be consistent
with the processes occurring in the body of a person running in
reality? respiration accelerates< blood pressure increases< the
heartbeat 'uickens< and e9en blood flow to the feet becomes
greater. Third< while the practitioner e1periences profound
changes of consciousness in the phase< this is when all direct and
indirect forms of autosuggestion are most effecti9e.
/ot all influences on physiology are 122E effecti9e.
=owe9er< e9en without a guaranteed rate of success< the effort to
influence physiology is worthy of attention because ama>ing
results can be obtained. 6lways remember that achie9ing a good
result may re'uire repeated influence from the phase. 9en in the
physical world< medications re'uire repeated ingestion.
&f the goal is to cure a disease< do not rely solely on the
phase. !ick persons must use the phase alongside treatment from
physicians. The more serious the illness< the more strongly this
rule applies.
Obtai"i"# I"for7atio"
The diagnosis of health problems may be performed with
the same techni'ues used for obtaining information. &t is also
possible to learn methods to cure health problems< if such
methods e1ist. %oth of these possibilities apply to third parties
being helped by efforts in the phase. &nformation gathering is the
only pro9en way to influence the physiology of other people by
using the phase. 4or e1ample< it is possible to find a well0known
healer in the phase and ask about personal health problems or the
problems of a friend or family member. 6 clarified answer may
be used in the assistance of traditional medical treatment.
15-
Atte"tio" fro7 octor$
4ind a doctor in the phase by using the techni'ue of
finding ob5ects and ask the doctor to take e1amine or treat a
known illness or other health problem. 4or e1ample< in case of
abdominal pains the doctor may palpate the belly< apply pressure
to 9arious points< and perform a special massage. 6ny actions are
possible< including an operation. 6fter lea9ing the phase< the
practitioner will feel a positi9e result.
Taki"# 7edici"e$
The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in
reality since all actions occur in a highly modified state of
consciousness and are percei9ed directly. Ob5ect locating
techni'ues may be used to find medications used to treat e1isting
problems. &t is also possible to create self0made substances to
produce the desirable effect. 4or e1ample< in case of an acute
headache in reality< a practitioner may take a painkiller while in
the phase and its effect will be partially felt in the wakeful state.
irect Effect
6n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions
in the phase. 4or e1ample< a sore throat may be warmed by
en9isioning a burning sensation in the throat or by mo9ing to a
hot location< like a sauna. &f a practitioner would like to increase
physical fle1ibility< then stretching in the phase will cause the
body to ad5ust to the none1istent action by rela1ing and tensing
the corresponding tendons and muscles.
Pro#ra77i"#
This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto0
training in the phase< which is more potent in the phase than
reality. 6 practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or
aloud and< if possible< should imagine e1periencing the desired
result. 4or e1ample< if the aim is to get rid of depression< a
practitioner should attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase<
e1periencing it to the fullest e1tent possible. !imultaneously<
silent repetition of a goal with complete understanding and
15(
e1pectation that e9erything will be alright< that e9erything is
wonderful will undoubtedly produce the desired effect.
.$eful e>perie"ce$
9erything with useful properties in reality should be
e1perienced as useful in the phase since the body will react in
practically the same manner. 7seful e1periences may include
e1ercising< going to the gym< ha9ing a massage< taking mud or
salt baths< and e1periencing pleasant emotions.
P$ycholo#y
Practicing phase0related techni'ues fa9orably affects the
psychology because it offers new opportunities and e9okes new
emotions. =owe9er< there are specific applications of the phase
that produce differing psychological effects. 4or e1ample< it is
possible to use the phase space as a bridge for dealing with
phobias by facilitating a setting where a practitioner may confront
and deal with certain fears. Farious comple1es may be defeated
in a similar manner. The use of a well0known techni'ue called re0
9isiting :recapitulation;< where a person re0e1periences ad9erse
e9ents while trying to relate to them in a new way< has been used
successfully in the phase.
Trai"i"#
6ny motor skills can be sharpened by using it in reality
and in the phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is
generated at the le9el of interaction between areas of the brain
that correspond to muscle action. &n the phase< wrestlers may
practice throws< karate fighters may practice punches and kicks<
and gymnasts may practice acrobatics. =a9ing enough time to
practice these actions in the phase is another matter.
.(PRO3E( EFFE%TS
People often approach the practice of 9arious phase states
with deep0rooted misconceptions about what can actually be
achie9ed through practice. 9erything listed in this section refers
to these misconceptions. &t has not been pro9en that any of these
153
things is impossible@ howe9er< actions should be based on pro9en
and 9erified methods in order to a9oid making mistakes and
wasting time.
Fhysical e,it/ &f the first e1perience with the phase
phenomenon happens by accident< it is almost impossible not to
interpret it as a real separation of the soul from the body # a
physical e1it. This is how the initial phase e1perience really feels.
,ith e1perience it becomes easily noticeable that certain things in
reality do not match things in the phase< like the placement of
ob5ects or furniture in the house where a phase is first
encountered.
/o actual physical e1it from the body has e9er been
pro9en through scientific e1perimentation and obser9ation. 4or
e1ample< in the phase< it is not possible to fly around to locations
in physical world< although it may seem so< the locations that are
e1perienced are produced within the mind. /or is it possible to
pinch someone in the phase and then to find a bruise on the
person while in reality.
Other $orlds/ The phase space is similar to the physical
world< and a practitioner may be inclined to think that the soul has
left the body. !ometimes the phase takes on an absolutely
unnatural form. 6s a result< the practitioner may decide that a
parallel world has been entered? the world beyond< the astral
plane< mental space< or the ether. 6lthough tra9el in the phase can
lead to many places< this does not mean that the phase allows
tra9el through or use of actual< alternate worlds. The practitioner
should be reasonable.
8evelop#ent of super-a"ilities/ &t is partially correct to
consider the practice of the phase as an e1trasensory ability since
it is an actual de9elopment of e1tremely unusual skills that ha9e
always been considered mystical. Times ha9e changed< and the
phase should hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric< obscure
corners of knowledge.
There e1ists an unpro9en theory that the practice of the
phase can impart unusual abilities. ,hile literature is full of
references to this effect< these abilities ha9e not yet been pro9en
by anyone. The same applies to intentionally de9eloping unusual
abilities in the phase. Oes< these may be trained while in the
15.
phase< but this does not mean that training in the phase will yield
the same results in the real world. Practice should not be for the
sake of achie9ing super0abilities since there are many pro9en
applications that do translate to reality in 9aluable ways. %e
realistic.
.SE OF T'E P'ASE B* T'E ISAB,E
,hile practicing the phase may still be 9iewed by the
ma5ority as entertainment or an element of self0de9elopment at
best< phase practice takes on a whole new meaning for the
physically disabled. 4or them< the phase may be the only place
where the handicaps of reality dissol9e and disabled practitioners
e1perience a range of possibility greater than the life e1perienced
in reality.
6 blind person will see again in the phase< e9en more
clearly than seeing people do in reality. !omeone who is
paraly>ed will be able walk< run< and also fly. 6 deaf person will
hear the murmur of streams and the chirping of birds. 4or the
disabled< the phase practice is a chance to disco9er new<
incomparable worlds free of physical limitation.
/aturally< there are some nuances that must be
understood. 4irst< for e1ample< if a person was born blind< then
there is the 'uestion as to whether or not they would be able to
see in the phase the same way ordinary people see. =owe9er< this
issue has not been fully studied< and blind people should simply
carry out their own independent research. !econd< some types of
disabilities can negati9ely affect the practice of the phase states.
4or e1ample< people who ha9e gone blind ha9e greater difficultly
catching the intermediate state between sleep and wakefulness
since< unlike seeing people< they may awaken without opening
their eyes to the perception of sound. Third< a purely
psychological disability plays an enormous negati9e role.
Psychologically disabled people ha9e a whole range of specific
beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.
,hate9er the indi9idual issues< this particular area of
phase applications re'uires additional study. &t deser9es
significant attention because it is a 9alid tool for the rehabilitation
1-2
of the disabled. &t is workable< uni'ue< and e1tremely surprising
in terms of the e1periences that it offers.
T*PI%A, )ISTA/ES
W'E( .SI(G APP,I%ATIO(S
6ttempting an applied use of the phase without reaching a
good depth. *eepening must always be performed before
applications are attempted.
%eing so in9ol9ed in phase applications that AmaintainingB
techni'ues are forgotten.
4orgetting to consider how to breathe when tra9eling through
Outer !pace or underwater< which may lead to asphy1iation.
"oncentrating on a certain ob5ect while tra9eling through time
instead of concentrating on time tra9el< which should be the focus
since it is the point of performing the applications.
4orgetting techni'ues for AmaintainingB when animate ob5ects
are encountered when these techni'ues must always be kept in
mind.
6n inability to o9ercome fear during contact with deceased
people. This fear must be o9ercome once and it will ne9er
resurface again.
Dimiting desires while practicing the phase. There is no limit
to desire within the phase.
Dimiting the performance of certain actions< although there
are no customary norms of beha9ior in the phase< unless the
practitioner decides upon specific limits.
,hile looking for information in the phase< attempting to
obtain knowledge which clearly e1ceeds the scope of the
subconscious mind.
6pplying the techni'ue of obtaining information from
animate ob5ects without knowing how to communicate with them.
4orgetting to check the ability of an ob5ect to con9ey 9alid
knowledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if
it is not 9erified.
4ailing to 9erify information in the phase before using it in
reality.
1-1
4orgetting to 9erify serious information obtained in the phase
in reality before using it. Ferification absolutely must be
performed to a9oid using bad information in reality.
6 single attempt to influence the physiology through the
phase. &n the ma5ority of cases< results are gained through
repeated effort.
6n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase<
whereas it is compulsory to seek medical ad9ice.
&nitially belie9ing that the phase is the e1it of the soul from
the body< while this is easily refuted in practice.
"oncentrating only on unpro9en applications< despite all the
e9idence out there that this is most likely a waste of time.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER !H
-ue$tio"$
1. ,hat are the three basic applications of the phaseJ
2. 6re pro9en practical phase applications accessible to any
practitionerJ
). ,hile in the phase< is it possible to actually tra9el through
6fricaJ
+. &s it possible to walk on the moon in the phaseJ
5. &s it possible< while in the phase< to appear at the time of
the arth8s creationJ
-. &n the phase< is it possible to appear in the magical world
behind the looking glassJ
(. ,hich relati9es can be met in the phaseJ
3. &s it possible to meet and talk to your fa9orite actor in the
phaseJ
.. ,here can one reali>e any cherished dreamJ
12. "an a practitioner appear in the computer game 8oo#J
11. "an a musician use the phase for creati9e purposesJ
12. *oes the practicing the phase influence a person8s
imaginationJ
1). ,hat most probably go9erns the phase spaceJ
1+. ,hat kind of information is obtainable in the phaseJ
1-2
15. ,hile in the phase< is it possible to find out where the lost
key to an apartment is locatedJ
1-. ,hat kind of people can disco9er where treasure is hidden
in the phaseJ
1(. !hould any information obtained in the phase be construed
as accurateJ
13. !hould information obtained in the phase be 9erified after
waking up< e9en if it8s already 9erified in the phaseJ
1.. !hould obtaining information occur before deepening has
been performedJ
22. To obtain information while using the animate ob5ects
techni'ue< who should be talked to if the goal is it to find out
the thoughts of a boss at workJ
21. =ow might information from an animate ob5ect be
obtainedJ
22. "an an inscription on a wall be used as an inanimate
source of informationJ
2). &s it possible to use the episode techni'ue to learn where
one has lost the key to one8s apartmentJ
2+. !hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a
disease through phase practiceJ
25. 6re results from influencing physiology in the phase
always 122E guaranteedJ
2-. ,hat phase techni'ues might be used to influence the
bodies of other peopleJ
2(. &s it possible to obtain information that can be used to
influence the body and its functionsJ
23. &s it possible to take a well0known painkiller in the phase
and feel its effects on e1itJ
2.. &s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phaseJ
)2. "an athletes use the phase to de9elop their skillsJ
)1. &s it realistic to e1pect to the soul will e1it the body while
practicing the phaseJ
)2. &s it possible to enter a parallel uni9erse through the
phaseJ
)). !hould a practitioner hope to de9elop super0abilities in the
phaseJ
1-)
Ta$k$
1. Fisit the Pyramids of $i>a in the phase. Meet your
fa9orite singer and tra9el to your dream house.
2. ,hile in the phase< find a wise person who is an authority
on matters of the phase and learn from them what entrance
techni'ues will best suit your practice.
). Try to percei9e heat throughout the entire body by
translocation to a sauna or through auto0suggestion.
+. Dearn to mo9e ob5ects by simply staring at them in the
phase< and appreciate the e1tent to which this skill is reflected
in reality.
(ou have in front of you a concise description of the
phase-s practical applications, al"eit in condensed for# as full
treat#ent of the topic re9uires #uch #ore than a single chapter)
. #uch #ore detailed description of $ays to practically apply the
phase, along $ith techni9ues for doing so, are contained in the
"oo% &'lti#ate (oga) The Technology of the 212
Transfor#ation*) +t also provides #any e,a#ples of the
pheno#enon in practice)
1-+
Watch now
1-5
Part III
Au>iliary I"for7atio"
%hapter !! & .$eful Tip$
A PRAG)ATI% APPROA%'
The only sure way to get practice without unnecessarily
wasting time is to ha9e a pragmatic and rational approach to the
nature and possibilities of the phase phenomenon.
The ma5ority of a9ailable information regarding
dissociati9e phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob9ious
during initial entries into the phase. This is why practice should
begin from the perspecti9e of a clean slate< using a logical bearing
in thinking? everything not confir#ed "y personal e,perience
should "e ta%en $ith a grain of salt) This means only personal
e1perience should be taken seriously< not the e1perience of
ac'uaintances< authors< teachers< blogs< or forums.
To err is human@ thus< it is also human to pass on errors.
6s a result< many parado1ical old wi9es8 tales concerning the
phase phenomenon ha9e become accepted a priori.
/ot e9erything written in esoteric literature should be
thrown out. !ome things may possibly be drawn from it. 6fter
reading such literature< a practitioner should not assume that the
new knowledge is a uni9ersal truth.
4or a house to stand firm< it needs a solid foundation. The
only way to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach
the phenomenon in a down0to0earth manner< from a scientific
perspecti9e< discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.
Once a solid foundation has been established< e9eryone has the
right to build their own truth on it.
I(EPE(E(T A(A,*SIS
1--
&f a practitioner is only interested in ha9ing phase
e1periences< then the simple treatment of this guidebook and
other materials may suffice. =owe9er< if a practitioner wants to
achie9e the best results< ample focus must be gi9en to indi9idual
thought and formation of opinion based on personal analysis.
7ntil all 'uestions are answered through a search for
answers in 9arious sources of information< no real progress should
be e1pected. Many things cannot be described or e1plained. The
resolution of many issues will always remain up to indi9idual
5udgment and understanding. 4inding all of the answers is
impossible. Moreo9er< trying to possess all of the answers is a
serious inhibitor to real progress because the practitioner would
ha9e to digress into dubious literature and con9ersation aside
from real< formati9e practice.
The ad9ice and e1periences of others may lead to error. &n
no case should there be any authorities or unachie9able ideals. 6
logical< e9en skeptical approach should be taken during research
and practice. The goal of this guidebook is to pro9ide the reader
with linear< factual information sufficient for the de9elopment of
independent analysis.
ach time a practitioner encounters some
incomprehensible phenomenon or problem when performing
phase techni'ues< an independent analysis of the phenomenon
should be formed before looking elsewhere for the cause. &f a
seeker looks for answers outside of personal reasoning< there is a
high risk of assimilating and acting upon a fallacy.
Many practitioners are not willing to analy>e personal
successes and failures< and instead search all sorts of books<
which often contradict one another< and using a hodge0podge of
e1traneous< un9erified information can only lead one to further<
and 'uite infectious< fallacy.
APPROA%' TO ,ITERAT.RE
Diterature of e9ery sort has always been the main 9ehicle
for disseminating information about the phase state. The phase
phenomenon is referred to by other terms? astral pro5ection< out0
1-(
of0body tra9el< or lucid dreaming. &n addition to disseminating
information< many books are often 9ehicles for disseminating
fallacies.
This is easy to recogni>e when researching se9eral such
books and comparing described e9ents and theories. The
information is more often than not contradictory and based on
opinions that ha9e ne9er been 9erified by anyone< including the
authors. The result is a mass of speculation that has no bearing on
reality< nearly always accompanied by a false certainty about the
sub5ect matter. =owe9er< unlike the real world< the phase is not a
place where one can belie9e one8s eyes or feelings. The phases8
appearance and 'ualities depend 9ery much on the person
e1periencing it.
4or e1ample< if a practitioner belie9es upon entering the
phase the body will be lying nearby on the bed< then it will always
be there. &f a practitioner belie9es that the percei9ed body should
always be tethered to the physical body< then in the practitioner
will always see and e9en feel a tether in the phase. This is a
simple case of e1pectations becoming reality. !imilarly< someone
who has entered the phase by accident and thinks that the time of
death has arri9ed may see angels and a tunnel with a light at the
end. &f someone is e1tremely religious< there may be a perception
that something holy< e9en $od< has appeared. &f entry to the phase
is construed as a result of being abducted by aliens< then that is
e1actly what will happen.
This would all be 'uite funny if it were not actually
encountered. ,hen it occurs< the only thing left to do is to
belie9e. To belie9e< to tell others about it< and write books about
it...
There are authors who impart no illusions< but it is often
difficult for a no9ice to separate the truth from illusion or open
fabrication< which is why a skeptical approach to the contents of
any book is warranted. The only truth con9eyed in any book is
that which has been 9erified by personal e1perience. The rest
should simply be noted and possibly taken into consideration.
&n conclusion< books should be studied to disco9er
techni'ue0related information that allows a practitioner to enter
1-3
the phase and control the e1perience. This is the only point of
intersection among all beliefs and theories.
PRA%TI%E E(3IRO()E(T
!ince techni'ues used to enter the phase are associated
with a specific type of mental operation< it is necessary to create
comfortable conditions so that e1ternal distracters are kept to a
minimum. 6 room should neither be too cold or too hot< nor too
bright. Performing techni'ues at a comfortable temperature in a
darkened room or while wearing a sleeping mask are ways to
promote unhindered practice.
&nterfering noises are often also ma5or distracters and
isolation from such noises is necessary to successful practice. &t is
often sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and
windows. &f this does not help< or if it is e1tremely loud outside
the window< one can use standard earmuffs.
&t is also helpful to gi9e ad9ance notice to people so that
they are not alarmed. &t is also preferable that no one is in the bed
with the practitioner. Most often< domestic animals interfere with
the performance of techni'ues< which is why they should be fed
beforehand and kept out of the room where direct or indirect
techni'ues are practiced.
TA,/I(G WIT' ,I/E-)I(E PEOP,E
$reat benefit is deri9ed by discussing personal
e1periences with other practitioners. This leads to an e1change of
information< new knowledge< and mutual help concerning certain
problems and issues.
The greatest effect comes through communication in
person< and not solely through mail< forums< and blogs. Meeting
face0to0face with like0minded people promotes camaraderie and a
useful knowledgebase to consider during indi9idual practice.
*ue to the fact that knowledge of the phenomenon is
underde9eloped< difficulties may arise in finding someone to talk
to. This can be sol9ed by personally sharing phase e1periences
with friends and family members< regardless of whether they are
1-.
fellow practitioners. &t is e9en better to pass on training literature<
like this guidebook.
The website www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum
de9oted to the phase< making it possible to obtain and e1change a
large amount of information. The site also has the contact
information for the coordinators of Phase Practitioner "lubs all
around the world< which is a non0commercial association of
enthusiasts who meet to e1change and discuss e1periences.

T'E RIG'T WA* TO /EEP A EO.R(A,
Heeping a 5ournal can be of much help while learning and
practicing the phase. ,hen properly kept< a 5ournal can help a
practitioner to de9elop an analysis that will increase the 'uality of
phase e1periences. %y and large< keeping a 5ournal helps to iron
out a sporadic practice< turning it into a structured discipline that
can be mastered.
6n effecti9e diary should contain a massi9e amount of
indicators that allow a statistical study to unco9er patterns. &t is
essential that each entry include the date< time of day or night< a
detailed account of entries into the phase and phase e1periences.
*escriptions of mistakes and a plan of action for the ne1t phase
should also be recorded. *uring the no9ice stages of practice<
e9en noting unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. Dater on<
only successful phase e1periences may be recorded.

=ere is an e1ample of a proper 5ournal entry?
ata8
7,perience 4o) 12
January ;
th
, 2I
2/== FM
E>perie"ce8
+ $o%e up early in the #orning) .fter e,ercising, +
too% a sho$er and ate "rea%fast) + $atched TG and read
"oo%s until lunch)
+ laid do$n for a nap at 1 FM, right after lunch) +
felt li%e perfor#ing indirect techni9ues, and affir#ed this
1(2
intention) + $o%e up the first ti#e to #ove#ent, "ut after
trying to e#ploy forced falling asleep Cin order to negate
the effects of the #ove#ent0, + fell asleep) + $o%e up the
second ti#e $ithout #ove#ent and tried to roll out) This
didn3t $or% and + tried levitating and getting up) .fter
that, + #oved on to phanto# $iggling) Move#ent
occurred in #y right hand) .fter doing this for several
seconds, + decided to try listening in) Sounds started, "ut +
$as una"le to #a%e the# louder) 5o$ever, i#ages
appeared "efore #y eyes and + started to vie$ the#) .fter
they "eca#e realistic, + decided to try rolling out and it
$or%ed $ithout a hitch)
My vision $as di#, as if through a veil) But then,
the rest of the sensations + felt reached the verge of
reality) This is $hen + $ent to the $indo$) For so#e
reason, it $as su##er outside, and not $inter) There $as
a red fire-truc% outside the $indo$) There $ere really lo$
clouds in the s%y) The sun $as a"ove the#)
4e,t, everything 9uic%ly faded a$ay and + found
#yself "ac% in #y "ody) Then, + got up and loo%ed at the
ti#e) +t $as 2/1; FM)
)i$take$8
1) :hen the phanto# $iggling $or%ed, + should have
aggressively tried to increase the range of #ove#ent, and
not si#ply done $iggling, let alone change to another
techni9ue) .fter all, if $iggling occurs, the phase can
al$ays "e entered) 2) The sa#e $ith the sounds) + had no
great desire to a#plify sounds or even listen in)
7verything $as done lac%adaisically) =) + should have
started $ith deepening and not actions, as visual
sensations $ere not vivid) J) + should have e#ployed
techni9ues for #aintaining) ;) (ou can3t loo% do$n for
long $ithout si#ultaneously using techni9ues for
#aintaining, yet + too% in everything outside the $indo$
and in the s%y) K) + forgot a"out the plan of action) L) +
should have tried again to enter the phase)
1(1
Pla" of actio" for "e>t ti7e8
8efinitely deepen the phase as #uch as possi"le) 2) +
should try to go through a $all) =) Translocate to #y
.untie in 4e$ (or%) J) Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty
and e,a#ine her cro$n) ;) Try to conduct the e,peri#ent
of putting #y hand into #y head)
1(2
%hapter !1 & Practitio"er$I E>perie"ce$
T'E SIG(IFI%A(%E
OF OT'ER PEOP,EIS E0PERIE(%ES
The ability to analy>e the e1periences of others can be a
great supplement to personal training. This allows a practitioner
to re9iew and think through situations that ha9e not yet been
personally encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the
e1periences of other practitioners< fewer mistakes will be made
during indi9idual practice.
Reading the e1periences contained in this section will
shed much light on proper phase practice. The actions that these
practitioners took to achie9e results will be subconsciously
retained by the reader8s memory. Dater< these actions may
reproduce similar circumstances in the phase< affording 9aluable
opportunities to respond using proper actions.
6t the beginning stages of practice< many practitioners
lack in real descriptions of phase e1periences while techni'ue0
related knowledge abounds. Techni'ues can be conceptuali>ed in
many different ways< while descriptions of their application are
much more demonstrati9e. Thus< many practitioners ha9e no idea
about how genuine practice transpires.
The e1periences described in this section are useful 0 e9en
from a psychological point of 9iew. 9en if a person belie9es that
the phase phenomenon e1ists< it may be construed as e1tremely
difficult or personally impossible. 6fter learning about other
people8s e1periences< a person will reali>e that these practitioners
ha9e been able to enter the phase without any complicated or
incomprehensible techni'ues. The reader will understand that the
1()
key is to take right actions at the right moment< trying to master
the phase with calmness and confidence.
,hile re9iewing and analy>ing other people8s e1periences
in this section< the reader should remember that these e1periences
are based on personal beliefs about the phenomenon< which is
why occult terminology and notions may be encountered.
=owe9er< such aspects of the descriptions are not important.
4ocus should be gi9en to techni'ue0related actions described in
the accounts. The reader should also take into account that some
nuances :like e1periential realism; are not always clear in the te1t
and that it is not always possible to determine why certain e9ents
occurred in the phase e1periences described here.
6ll of the following descriptions belong to real people
who either related the accounts orally< wrote them down during
classes at the !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el< submitted them 9ia
email< or posted them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the
total number of recorded< 9erifiable phase descriptions e1ceeds
one thousand< only se9eral cases that are illustrati9e and useful
for de9eloping analysis ha9e been selected. Primarily< these are
descriptions of the practitioners8 initial phase e1periences< which
are most rele9ant to new practitioners.
The large number of mistakes made by almost e9ery
practitioner< regardless of their le9el of e1perience< should not be
taken too seriously while reading the comments. 6ctually< it is a
rare occasion that the phase is e1perienced without any techni'ue0
related errors. 9erybody makes mistakes.
1periments are listed in ascending order of 'uality and
number of properly performed actions. 6ccounts ha9e been
published with the permission of the authors.
A(A,*SIS OF SE,E%TE
PRA%TITIO(ERSJ E0PERIE(%ES
(o; !
Bori$ Pro"yaki"
%opy9riter; /iev: .krai"e
+ $o%e up in the &correct* state) + i##ediately felt
vi"rations, and "efore + had ti#e to ti#e to thin% a"out anything,
1(+
+ $as %noc%ed out of #y "ody "y a strong %ic%) + started falling) +
had no vision, the floor $as gone) Mi%e a nose-diving airplane, +
$as in a free-fall) + %ept dropping faster and faster) + started to
feel that + $as losing control) The only thing + could do $as
increase the speed $ith $hich + fell, all of the $ays that occurred
to #e to try #aintain the phase that + atte#pted at that #o#ent
only lo$ered #y degree of a$areness) Touching did not do
anything for #e, as + $as 6ust an une#"odied spirit in a co#plete
vacuu#) Gision $as also #issing) + started to panic due to the
i##inent foul) But the acceleration of the fall did not help either,
and + $as flying and $aiting for the #o#ent $hen + $ould "e
thro$n out into the drea# $orld) .nd + dropped li%e this until +
fell asleep)
-ue$tio"$8 *id %oris describe a direct or indirect
techni'ueJ ,hat could he ha9e done if no spontaneous separation
had occurredJ =ow could %oris ha9e more correctly used
deepening techni'uesJ ,hy wasnCt %oris thrown into a phase
episodeJ ,hy did he fall asleepJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 6n indirect techni'ue was
employed. &f spontaneous separation had not occurred< %oris
could ha9e tried to separate on his own. &f an attempt to separate
had failed< it would be necessary to implement indirect techni'ues
by intensifying the 9ibrations< and then try once again to separate.
&n order to deepen and< meanwhile< reach a destination while
falling< %oris should ha9e applied translocation techni'ues and<
upon reaching a location< continued to deepen by means of
sensory amplification. 4or e1ample< he could ha9e applied the
techni'ue of translocation by teleportation with his eyes closed or
simply tried to catch sight of his hands through the darkness<
which also would ha9e induced an e1it.
%oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears.
&t could ha9e been used for the techni'ue of listening in< which
would ha9e helped him to deepen and maintain. The lack of a set
aim to land somewhere resulted in his endless fall< though it does
not always happen this way. %oris fell asleep due to his passi9ity
and also because he forgot that falling asleep was a possibility<
though he did remember about the possibility of an inad9ertent
return to reality :a foul;.
1(5
(o; 1
Ale>ei Bakharev
E"#i"eer; Sochi: Ru$$ia
This $as the first ti#e that + #anaged to "eco#e
conscious $hile drea#ing) Before falling asleep, + concentrated
on the dar%ness "efore #y eyes and tried to re#ain consciousness
as long as + could) .ll of a sudden, + drea#t that + $as levitating
to the ceiling, $hich resulted in #y "eco#ing conscious that +
$as drea#ing) My phanto# "ody responded poorly to atte#pts to
control it, and si#ply hovered "eneath the ceiling) There $ere
t$o people sitting on the floor "elo$) They $ere loo%ing in #y
direction, "ut it see#ed that they did not see #e) .t this point +
$o%e up and felt so#e sort of tingling and itching in #y legs)
-ue$tio"$8 ,hat factors led to the entry into the phase
through dream consciousnessJ ,hat needed to be done while
ho9ering about beneath the ceilingJ ,hy did the foul happen so
fastJ ,hat should ha9e been done immediately after returning to
the bodyJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 *ream consciousness occurred
due to the 6le1ei8s intent to concentrate on the space before his
eyes and his desire to remain conscious for as long as possible.
The process of becoming conscious was caused by the sensation
of flying while dreaming. 4lying almost always becomes an
anchor for dream consciousness. &mmediately after the phase
occurred< 6le1ei should ha9e started deepening. &nstead< he
simply ho9ered about and obser9ed. ,hile all the mo9ements
may ha9e been difficult to perform< they should ha9e ne9ertheless
still been done 9ery acti9ely. 6s a result< lightness and a
deepening of the phase would ha9e ensued. =is inad9ertent e1it
from the phase happened due to passi9ity< failure to deepen< and
non0compliance with the rules for maintaining the phase. 9en
upon returning to his body< 6le1ei should ha9e tried to separate
again.
(o; ?
7itry )arkov
Radio )echa"ic; )o$co9: Ru$$ia
1(-
My first ti#e $as the #ost terri"le event in #y life) + had
never e,perienced such terror) +t happened in 8ece#"er, 1!!) +
$as falling asleep in #y "ed at ho#e) Suddenly, + heard so#eone
enter #y roo#, "ut + did not pay attention to the &intruder*)
Then, t$o fe#ale hands gra""ed #e fro# "ehind, and $hile
pressing #y "elly, started to lift #y "ody up) + distinctly felt thin
fingers $ith long nails on #y "elly, "ut $as co#pletely paraly1ed
and a"solutely una"le #ove any part of #y "ody or put up any
%ind of resistance) + felt #y "ody go through the ceiling, "ut then
$as pulled still higher and higher)
+ got scared that this could "e death) + $as afraid not so
#uch of death as of the un%no$n) .ll of this happened so s$iftly
that + found #yself unprepared for such a crossover) + started to
pray) + as%ed @od to help #e free #yself and go "ac%) + panic%ed)
+ can3t say ho$ #any seconds #y forced levitation lasted or ho$
high + $as lifted a"ove #y house, "ut the #o#ent ca#e $hen +
instantly returned to #y "ed)
-ue$tio"$8 ,as this entry into the phase deliberateJ ,hat
kind of techni'ue led to the phaseJ ,hat is the name for the
complete immobili>ation that *mitry encounteredJ ,hat should
he ha9e done in order to start mo9ingJ ,hy did his body easily
go through the ceilingJ ,hy was he able to stop this terrible
e1perience by prayingJ ,hat could he ha9e done immediately
upon returning to his bodyJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 This phase e1perience was
spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni'ues
since there was no significant lapse into sleep. The whole
e1perience was accompanied by sleep paralysis< which is why it
was difficult for *mitry to do anything. &n order to mo9e in this
type of situation< it would ha9e been necessary to intensify the
phase state by using an indirect techni'ue or redouble efforts to
mo9e.p
*mitry8s body went through the ceiling without any
difficulty because there was no 9ision and the phase itself had not
been deepened< otherwise this would not ha9e happened so easily.
Praying and appealing to $od helped in this case because praying
facilitated a rela1ation of perceptions and an intention to go back
to reality? two factors which are crucial during emergency return
1((
techni'ues. 7pon returning to his body< he could ha9e still tried to
separate again< though this would ha9e been easier said than done
due to the fear associated with the first e1perience.
(o; @
Iva" *akovlev
Stude"t; A"t9erp: Bel#iu7
+ don3t %no$ $hat $o%e #e up, "ut + %ne$ right a$ay that
so#ething $as out of order) + could not open #y eyes, and #y
"ody $as al#ost 6ust as%ing to rise up) + understood $hat $as
going on N all of this indicated that + $as having an out-of-"ody
e,perience) The first thing + tried $as to lift #y left hand up, and
it $or%ed) + understood that this $as an astral hand, "ecause +
could see through it) + #oved hastily and carefully to the other
side of the "ed CThere $as a strange sensation in #y head at that
ti#e0) + cal#ed do$n and tried to do so#ething again) + levitated
a"out half a #eter a"ove the "ed) Gision ca#e "ac% to #e right
then and + sa$ $hat appeared to "e #y roo#, "ut not e,actly it,
as the rug on the floor $as of a different color pattern and the
door $as closed for so#e reason) + could not co#prehend $hy
everything $as lit fro# "ehind #y "ac%) Then, + loo%ed over #y
left shoulder and sa$ a s#all "right $hite "all "ehind #y
shoulder "lade at a distance of I inches) +t $as lighting up the
roo# up) Then + tried to go through the door, "ut $as una"le to)
Out of the fear that + $ould never return to #y real "ody, + $o%e
up in the everyday $orld)
-ue$tio"$8 *uring the beginning of his e1perience< what
phenomenon typical to the phase and awakening did &9an
encounterJ ,hat kind of techni'ue< direct or indirect< led to the
phaseJ ,hat specific techni'ues were employedJ =ow could the
sensation of Athe body 5ust asking to rise upB ha9e been usedJ
,hat should ha9e been done immediately when he reali>ed that it
was possible to raise his handJ ,hat should ha9e been the first
actions taken after le9itationJ ,hy was it unnecessary to
immediately try to go through the doorJ ,hat should ha9e been
done when &9an returned to his bodyJ *oes this practitioner ha9e
a down0to0earth 9iew or an esoteric 9iew of the nature of this
phenomenonJ
1(3
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 7pon awakening in a state of
sleep paralysis< &9an understood that he could use this opportunity
for the phase and immediately started attempts to separate without
employing techni'ues for creating the state< as they would ha9e
been superfluous. This was an indirect techni'ue by nature. =e
could ha9e followed his impulse to le9itate from the 9ery
beginning instead of mo9ing his hands. 6fter his hand started to
mo9e< he could ha9e stood up or separated. &nstead< &9an simply
rolled o9er and calmed down for an instant< although doing so is
strongly discouraged and is a waste of the progress made up to
this point. Then< after starting to le9itate< he should ha9e< first of
all< assumed a position distinct from that of his real body< stood
up on the floor< and immediately started deepening. &nstead< he
di9erted his attention to the light source and an attempt to go
through the door.
9en if e9erything had been done correctly from the
beginning< there would ha9e been no reason to attempt to go
through the door. &9an could ha9e simply opened it. The skill of
going through ob5ects should be learned after first fine0tuning the
ability to deepen and maintain the phase. There was no reason to
return out of fear< but e9en a return to the body< another
immediate attempt at separating would most likely ha9e been
successful.
The use of the term of Aastral handB indicates that the
practitioner harbors esoteric 9iews on the sub5ect.
(o; <
(atalya /o=he"ova
E"#i"eer; Shchelkovo: Ru$$ia
:hen + $as a"out 1L or 1I years old, + read so#e esoteric
articles on astral pro6ection) They see#ed 9uite interesting to #e,
"ut no #ore than a curiosity N + did not particularly "elieve in
such things)
One evening, + $ent to "ed as usual) + $o%e up in the
#iddle of the night, "ut $as una"le to #ove #y "ody and there
$as a loud noise in #y head) 5aving "een re#inded of those
articles, + si#ply tried to levitate and + #anaged to do so, as if
through #y forehead so#eho$) The sensation of flying $as very
1(.
realistic, to #y great surprise) The first thought that occurred to
#e $as, O:o$, these astral guys $eren3t lying2* + hovered a"ove
#y "ody for so#e ti#e in the dar%) + thought of vision, and it
started to appear) + then fle$ to$ards the $indo$, and upon
turning around in to face #y "ody, + sa$ it in its proper place) +
decided to fly "ac% to it and touch it) :hen + finally po%ed it, it
suc%ed #y "ac% into it, causing a 9uite strange sensation)
-ue$tio"$8 ,hat type of techni'ue did /atalya useJ ,hat
would she ha9e needed to do if her attempt at le9itating had been
unsuccessfulJ ,hy was the phase short0li9edJ ,hat should she
ha9e done upon returning to her bodyJ ,hy did she use the term
AastralBJ ,ere the articles about astral pro5ection of any
significant helpJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 7pon awakening in a state of a
sleep paralysis< /atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing
indirect techni'ues. !he managed to separate immediately< but if
she8d encountered problems in doing so< she could ha9e started
the techni'ue of listening in to the AnoiseB in her head. The phase
was short0li9ed due to a lack of acti9ity and failure to perform
deepening and AmaintainingB techni'ues. 6fter returning to her
body< she should ha9e tried to immediately separate.
/atalya holds esoteric 9iews on the nature of the phase
phenomenon< which is why she uses such terminology for it.
=owe9er< the articles helped her to perform the right actions at
the right moment.
(o B
Ale>a"der Fur7e"kov
Stude"t; Sai"t Peter$bur#: Ru$$ia
+ $o%e up at early in the night after so#e difficulties $ith
falling asleep) Blurred i#ages started to float "efore #y eyes and
+ reali1ed that + could enter the phase) + started to discard
unnecessary i#ages, and after getting ahold of one of the#, +
e#erged in so#e %ind of a yello$ corridor) The level of general
realness and a$areness of the e,perience $as a"out I< to !<
of that of reality) + re#e#"ered a"out the #ethods for deepening,
$hich is $hy + started to loo% at everything going on around #e,
"ut this did not yield any serious results) + started to touch #yself,
132
"ut all sensation see#ed so#e$hat da#pened) + reali1ed that +
$as losing a$areness) + ca#e round, "ut nevertheless fell asleep
in a"out 2 seconds)
-ue$tio"$8 &s it possible to call the techni'ue used in this
description a direct techni'ueJ ,hat specific techni'ue for
creating the phase was employedJ ,hich separation techni'ue
did 6le1ander useJ ,hat could ha9e been the reason for the
Adampened sensationB and inability to deepenJ ,hat caused him
to fall asleepJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 The techni'ue employed
cannot be considered a direct one< though it was used at the
beginning of the night. 6s a matter of fact< it appears that the
preliminary lapse of consciousness into sleep was significant. &f
such preliminary sleep had lasted only se9eral minutes< the
techni'ue could ha9e been considered partially direct. The
techni'ue for obser9ing images was employed correctly because
the images appeared on their own.
6le1ander did not employ any techni'ues for separation<
as the obser9ing images techni'ue often brings the obser9er into
the obser9ed image or some other world< which is e1actly what
happened here. Most likely< the weakness of the phase was due to
meager le9els of acti9ity and moti9ation< which were caused by
the fact that it was early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep
because he failed to deepen sufficiently and not keep from falling
asleep. $eneral acti9ity was also 9ery low. The body8s desire to
fall asleep played a ma5or role in the process. 6le1ander had< after
all< been ha9ing problems sleeping.
(o; C
Ro7a" Reutov
Sy$te7 Ad7i"i$trator; Sa7ara: Ru$$ia
Truly, the #ost interesting things al#ost al$ays happen
une,pectedly)
.fter a sufficiently long "rea% in #y atte#pts to go to the
other $orld, tonight + decided to try it again) + thre$ in the to$el
after yet another unsuccessful atte#pt, rolled to #y other side,
and decided to si#ply get a good night3s sleep) + do not %no$
e,actly ho$ #uch ti#e passed $hile + lay do$n and thought
131
a"out $hat + $as still doing $rong $hile o"serving interesting
i#ages that #y i#agination $as dra$ing) But at one fine
#o#ent, + suddenly felt the pheno#enon that is co##only
referred to as vi"rations) + started to intensify the# C+ should add
that the feeling is indescri"a"le0, "ut + could not levitate, though +
really $anted to ta%e a loo% at #yself fro# the outside) + decided
to si#ply stand up, and that3s $hen it all "eca#e #ost
interesting2 The entire process of transitioning fro# a hori1ontal
position to a vertical one $as acco#panied "y increasingly
palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring sound in #y
head) The sensation $as the sa#e as that e,perienced after going
to "ed after not having slept for 2J hours and then "eing suddenly
roused "y so#e"ody/ #y head spun, everything started crac%ling
inside of it, and + $as a"out to lose consciousness) Then, a
flic%ering picture started to appear) +t sta"ili1ed after one or t$o
seconds, the roaring in #y head died do$n, and + reali1ed that +
$as sitting on #y "ed)
+ $as in #y apart#ent, thought it $as noticea"ly altered)
My roo# see#ed #ore or less the sa#e, though the interior $as
indeed different upon detailed e,a#ination) For e,a#ple, #y
#o"ile phone, $hich is al$ays $ithin a reach, $as so#eho$ an
older and different #odel) +t turned out to "e the first o"6ect that +
tested, as + suddenly $anted very #uch to find out $hat ti#e it
$as and chec% $hich day of the #onth it $as) + distinctly felt the
phone in #y hand, "ut upon atte#pting to concentrate on and
loo% at the display, + $as thro$n "ac% into the reality) +
i##ediately cli#"ed "ac% out of #y "ody and decided to si#ply
pace around the apart#ent $hile trying to re#e#"er $hat +
could e,peri#ent on) + tried to con6ure an o"6ect, "ut that didn3t
$or% and resulted in so#e #ental activity) This caused the phase
to fade and #y "eing thro$n "ac% into reality) +n total, there $ere
a"out five successive entries into the phase that lasted for 2 to =
#inutes each) The e,periences $ere not sta"le at all, $hich is
$hy + $as e,a#ining #y surroundings in a hurry, al$ays trying
to get ahold of anything + could get #y hand on) 5o$ever, there
$ere a good a#ount of i#pressions, considering that it $as #y
first entry)
132
-ue$tio"$8 ,hat type of techni'ue did Roman use to
enter the phaseJ ,hat were the key precursors of the phaseJ
,hich separation techni'ue was usedJ &f Roman had failed to
completely separate< what techni'ue< besides 9ibrations< should
he ha9e consideredJ ,hat is the most likely reason for all of the
foulsJ ,hich single action allowed the practitioner to make the
phase fi9e times longerJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 The phase was entered through
a direct techni'ue< with the comfortable position that Roman was
lying in being the main catalyst. 6s long as Roman was lying in
an uncomfortable position< his mind was unable to completely
turn off physical perception< and this was most likely the reason
why there were no short lapses in dreaming. &f Roman were still
unable to separate when using the techni'ue of standing up< or
any other techni'ue besides intensifying the 9ibrations< he could
ha9e tried listening in< as there was some noise.
&nstead of using his first phase e1perience to work on
mastering the basic skills of deepening and maintaining< Roman
immediately indulged in comple1 e1periments< which is why his
multiple entries within the same phase were brief< of poor 'uality<
and not used effecti9ely. %ut this is all typical during initial
e1periences and a lot was still accomplished< especially
considering that a direct techni'ue was used. The relati9e length
of the phase was achie9ed mainly thanks to complying with the
single way to maintain the phase # repeated separation< which
Roman managed to do fi9e times.
(o; D
Ale>a"der yre"kov
Stude"t; )o$co9: Ru$$ia
My first entry happened at night) + $as lying in "ed and
thin%ing a"out the phase, as + had "een una"le to fall asleep for a
$hile) + do1ed off for a #o#ent and then a$o%e again, this ti#e
already in the proper state, and then easily rolled out C#ore or
less unconsciously and refle,ively0) + $ent deeper "y #eans of
touching and then falling headfirst) +t is a pity that +3ve already
forgotten a lot of the e,perience, "ut + do re#e#"er that after
deepening + fell right do$n onto the yard of #y grand#other3s
13)
house, "ut then lost consciousness, and so + returned into #y
"ody and rolled out of it several ti#es) + $as una"le to sharpen
all #y senses/ :hen + deepened one sense Ctouch, for e,a#ple0,
another Ci)e) sight0 $ould fade a$ay) .fter that, + have a gap in
#y #e#ory concerning #y travels Cconsciousness and lucidity
$ere $ea%, and + fell asleep and &resurfaced* several ti#es0, "ut
+ re#e#"er having "een to a lot of places)
5ere-s ho$ the episode ended/ + dove headfirst into $ater
fro# a high "oard Cafter first having deepened a "it0, and then #y
sense of touch gre$ sharper/ + felt &$ater* and hit #y head
against a very soft &"otto#)* + resu#ed the interrupted fall
through $illpo$er, "ut then it occurred to #e that #y
grand#other $anted to $a%e #e up) My level of a$areness $as
not 9uite ade9uate, as it did not occur to #e that + $as actually
sleeping in a dor#itory, and not at #y grand#other-s house)
That3s $hy + decided that + needed to return to #y "ody) . sharp
fall occurred right after that thought, and $as follo$ed "y
sensations si#ilar to those one e,periences $hen hung-over)
-ue$tio"$8 ,as a direct or indirect techni'ue appliedJ
,hat made the implementation of the techni'ue successfulJ ,hy
was 6le1ander e5ected into his grandmotherCs yardJ ,hile
deepening< how could the problem of the senses being enhanced
only one at a time ha9e been sol9edJ ,hy did the practitioner
ha9e gaps in his memoryJ ,hat were the main problems
associated with maintaining the phaseJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 *espite the brief lapse in
consciousness< the techni'ue used was a direct one< and that 9ery
lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state<
e9en though this was 6le1ander8s first e1perience. The e5ection
into his grandmotherCs yard was spontaneous< and was most likely
caused by some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a
habit of going there. 7ne1pected translocation often occurs when
deepening while falling headfirst.
Nuite possibly< in order to a9oid ha9ing the senses of sight
and touch enhance only one at a time< he should ha9e
simultaneously applied the techni'ues of touching and looking
out. 6s for maintaining the phase< there were three main problems
that were also direct causes of the gaps in 6le1anderCs memory?
13+
little depth< lack of a clear plan of action< and non0compliance
with the rules for maintaining the phase :with the e1ception of
multiple entries after return to the body;.
(o; F
Svyato$lav Bara"ov
Stude"t; Per7: Ru$$ia
+ $o%e up on #y side) + didn3t feel li%e sleeping any#ore,
"ut + closed #y eyes any$ay) :hen + lay do$n on #y "ac%, +
i##ediately felt the sensation that + $as a"out to fall fro# the
couch C+ $as lying on the edge0, and so#e %ind of lapse occurred,
as if + $as "eing pulled so#e$here) + lay do$n once again, and
this "u11ing started, and a green light appeared "efore #y eyes) +
lay "ac% even further, and #y eyelids started to flutter) + thought
that + #ight fall fro# the couch at that #o#ent, "ut then #y
vision ca#e to #e, and + o"served that + $as already lying on the
floor ne,t to the couch2 + got up on #y feet and noticed that the
roo# $as &spinning* as if + $ere drun%, "ut everything 9uite
9uic%ly $ent "ac% to nor#al) .t that very #o#ent, + understood
that this $as it2 The phase itself2
+n ecstasy, + forgot a"out all the techni9ues and $ent to
loo% a"out the roo#) 7verything $as 6ust li%e in reality, "ut so#e
things $ere out of place) + tried to levitate and "ent "ac%$ards,
and $as so#eho$ thrust outside) +t $as dus% out there, and there
$as a lot of sno$ on the ground) + $ent around the house and
tried to levitate) + $as a"le to soar up$ards, and sa$ the hori1on
and sunset) But then + "egan to lose altitude) .fter having flo$n
to the $indo$ on the other side of the house, + $anted to go up to
the roof, "ut then a foul occurred) +n a fraction of a second, + had
the sensation that + $as &no$here*) But then, #y real eyes
opened C$ith difficulty0 and there $as once again the feeling of
so#e sort of lapse) .$areness $as di# during the phase,
apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep)
-ue$tio"$8 ,hat kind of phase entrance techni'ue did
!9yatosla9 useJ ,hich specific techni'ue produced resultsJ
,hich separation techni'ue was employedJ &f separation was
unsuccessful< which techni'ue should ha9e been immediately
usedJ ,hich important actions did he not perform enough after
135
entering the phaseJ ,hat should ha9e been done after the foulJ
,hy was awareness dim during the phaseJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"tary8 6n indirect techni'ue was
employed. /o phase state creation techni'ues were employed by
!9yatosla9. &nstead< separation immediately worked through
rolling backwards. &f separation were unsuccessful< he should
ha9e proceeded with obser9ing images< which would ha9e been
possible with the green light.
*eepening was not immediately performed< no effort was
made to maintain< and there was no appro1imation of a plan of
action@ howe9er< this is not a crucial factor during initial
e1periences. 6nother attempt to enter the phase should ha9e been
made upon returning to the body< but this was also forgotten.
6wareness was dim and memory was weak during the phase
because of the initial shallowness of the state< which was reflected
in the perception of the surrounding and also the thought
processes.
(o; !H
Ole# Su$hche"ko
Sport$7a"; )o$co9: Ru$$ia
Mast night + spent a"out an hour developing the interplay
of i#ages in #y #ind after + no left felt any feeling of %inesthetic
sense) + $as lying on #y "ac% in an unco#forta"le position) .fter
sliding to$ards sleep for so#e ti#e, + felt slight vi"rations and
echoes of sounds fro# the drea# $orld, "ut the unco#forta"le
position still hindered #e) +n the end, + thought the hec% $ith it,
and decided to lie do$n ho$ever $as co#forta"le, and turned
over to lie on #y sto#ach) 8espite the fact that the #ove#ent
upset the process, after a"out five #inutes the state "egan to
return and "uild up) + $as a"le to get a little vi"ration this ti#e,
although + $as una"le to a#plify it) + dre$ a picture of #y
%itchen in #y #ind, and "ecause the i#ages in that state $ere
really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so#e ti#e + understood
that not only $ere #y attention and a$areness there, "ut so $ere
#y "odily sensations) + $as 9uite surprised that the phase had
"een so easy to fall in to Cthere $as no dou"t that this $as the
phase0)
13-
+ 6u#ped out through the $indo$ and "egan to fly around
the courtyard) .ctually, it $as the first ti#e that + had flo$n only
upon a single #ental co##and, $ithout any physical effort, as
occurs during drea#s) The courtyard "ore only 1< si#ilarity to
its real-life counterpart, "ut + $as not at all surprised "y this, and
+ si#ply en6oyed it as #uch as + could, as + $as a"le see and $as
not i##ediately thro$n out) But, after having loo%ed at and ta%en
in the city, the thought of $hether or not this $as the phase and
not 6ust a lucid drea# occurred) + $as so conscious in the drea#
that + $as a"le to %no$ a"out and co#prehend such ter#s, and
differentiate "et$een the# - can you i#agineH2 + have to add that
+ gave little attention to #y #e#ory, so + can3t say ho$ #uch of
#y &self-a$areness* $as there, "ut + $as a$are enough to "e
a"le to differentiate "et$een the phase and a lucid drea# Cor at
least thin% a"out the difference0) + even $ent and as%ed people
around if it $as the phase or a lucid drea#) Sounds funny,
doesn-t itH The funniest thing $as that they ans$ered that it $as a
different $orld, and they refused to discuss the topic any further
$ith #e) Then, + decided to not get #y #ind all #i,ed up and 6ust
go $ith the plot, $hich turned out to "e 9uite long and
uninterrupted2 + recalled a #o#ent fro# the day "efore ho$ +
had lain do$n and induced the phase $hile lying on #y "ac%, and
ho$ + had turned over and flo$n a$ay) + recalled all this
periodically during the course of the phase, and reali1ed that +
should try to as% a"out $hat had "een going on $ith #e on the
foru# later)
Then, later in the phase, + found #yself in a "ase#ent) .s
there $as 6ust a really nasty s#ell there, + decided that + had
already had enough and that it $as ti#e to go "ac%) That
happened even #ore easily, as soon as + thought a"out going
"ac%, a vi"ration as light as a "ree1e $ent through #e and then +
$as "ac% in #y "ody $ith full a$areness and a $ell-rested "ody
and #ind) + $as co#pletely refreshed2 .nd that3s despite the fact
that + re#e#"er everything, every second of the drea#, fro# the
#o#ent + started flying2
-ue$tio"$8 ,hich type of techni'ue helped Oleg enter the
phaseJ ,hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase<
and could this ha9e had a positi9e effect on later resultsJ ,hat
13(
can be said of techni'ues related to 9ibrations in the conte1t of
OlegCs entry into the phaseJ ,hich specific techni'ue brought
him into the phaseJ ,hich initial actions should ha9e been taken
upon entry into the phaseJ ,hat was lacking that could ha9e lead
to producti9e use of the phaseJ ,as it worthwhile to immediately
translocate by 5umping through the windowJ ,hat was the cause
of reflection on whether the e1perience was the phase or a
conscious dreamJ ,as it beneficial to try to offhandedly learn
from ob5ects what type of state this wasJ ,hy did the desire to
return back to the body arise< and what could ha9e caused itJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"tary8 Oleg entered the phase using
a direct techni'ue. =e was initially unable to enter due to the
uncomfortable position that he had assumed< although lapses in
consciousness into short dreams did occur. /e9ertheless< the
initially unsuccessful techni'ue still ended in a positi9e final
outcome because the state that Oleg was in was close to the
phase. =owe9er< attention should not ha9e been gi9en to 9ibration
amplification techni'ues< especially straining the brain and
straining the body without using muscles< as they can be
detrimental during direct techni'ues.
The techni'ue of 9isuali>ation was used immediately
before entering the phase instead of obser9ing images< which is
used more often. Oleg deliberately con5ured the obser9ed images
instead of searching for them in front of himself< which is where
the difference between the techni'ues lies. =owe9er< he did not
perform deepening upon entering the phase. 6dditionally< he had
no clear plan of action to ensure that the phase would be
producti9e !tarting to translocate by 5umping through windows
should only be done by those with a certain amount of e1perience
since beginners sometimes percei9e reality to be the phase< or the
phase to be reality.
The reason for the reflection on the nature of the
phenomenon was due to terminological confusion< which is 'uite
widespread. &f a practitioner is aware but does not feel the body as
in the physical world< then it can be assumed that the phase has
been entered. This is why there was no reason to in'uire about
this among animate ob5ects.
133
*eliberately returning to the body was a big mistake.
There was no reason to throw away an opportunity to tra9el and
use the phase. %eginners are not often afforded such an
opportunity. The reason for the return to the body in this case is
most likely found in the absence of a plan of action and lack of
clear understanding of how the phase might be used for practical
aims.
(o; !!
Ale>a"der ,elekov
%o7puter Pro#ra77er; Sai"t Peter$bur#: Ru$$ia
+ tried all night to use the .stral ?atapult that cues you
$hen you3re drea#ing, "ut + gave up on the idea after several
unsuccessful a$a%enings and si#ply fell asleep) :hen +-#
drea#ing + usually #ove "y ta%ing great leaps, #uch further than
a %angaroo, a"out 1-= yards) This happens regularly in #y
drea#s, and + usually i##ediately reali1e that +-# in a drea#)
8uring one of the leaps, + reali1ed $hile air"orne that + $as
drea#ing and also reali1ed that + $as a"le to land in a s#all
dirty pond) .s e,pected, + landed right in the pond and $ent deep
under the $ater) .nd at that very #o#ent, + found #yself in the
stencil, $ith #y hands and head half stuc% in it)
+ got a little nervous that this atte#pt $ould also "e
unsuccessful, and so + i##ediately tried to separate fro# #y
"ody) + $as una"le to get #y head or hands out, and for the first
ti#e + tried to turn around round #y a,is and #anaged to get out)
Then + either slipped do$n or fell fro# the "ed, "ut + did not feel
any pain) + cra$led for 1-2 #eters and then felt that + could go
"ac%) + started to touch the rug and so#e other thing, though +
don3t %no$ e,actly $hat it $as as it $as dar%, and, lo and
"ehold/ $ithin 2-= seconds + pro"a"ly felt $hat s#all %ittens
feel $hen their eyes open for the first ti#e) 7verything $as foggy
and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the roo#
filled $ith light, and colors "eca#e "right and vivid) + tried very
hard to restrain #y e,cite#ent, and, to #y surprise, $as a"le to)
+ $al%ed around #y apart#ent thin%ing a"out $hat +
should do) Reali1ing that + did not have that #uch ti#e, + decided
to tal% to an elderly #an $ho $ould ans$er #y 9uestions) +
13.
decided that there $ould "e an o#niscient elderly #an "ehind the
apart#ent-s front door, $hich + $as a"out to open) .nd there he
$as, half-"ald, a"out K years old, in a grey coat $aiting for #e)
+ as%ed hi# the 9uestion, &:hat should + do to get into the phase
#ore oftenH* But he started to tell #e a"out ho$ he $as raped as
a child) .nd to "e #ore precise, this $as already not an elderly
#an, "ut an elderly $o#an) + $as not very interested in hearing
her story, thus + tried to #ove a$ay fro# her, suggesting that $e
could tal% later) But the elderly $o#an $as persistent, and + did
not $ant to offend her, "ecause + thought that this $as an unusual
drea# $ith its o$n set of rules, and na#ely that once you have
as%ed an old $o#an a 9uestion, you are supposed to "e
courteous and listen to the entire ans$er)
+ $ent $ith her to the %itchen of #y apart#ent) The
telephone suddenly rang) + got scared that the telephone $as
ringing in #y apart#ent and $ould $a%e #e up, $hich is $hy +
i##ediately started to loo% at #y hand in order to #aintain) But
the sensations $ere 9uite sta"le, and + stopped doing that) Then,
#e and this lady $anted to coo% so#ething in #y %itchen) She
said that + could heat a frying pan $ithout gas) But + instead
decided to try the techni9ue of putting the hands together and
"lo$ing on the#, and returned "ac% into #y "ody)
-ue$tio"$8 ,hich type of the entry into the phase did
6le1ander describeJ ,as the cueing program of any helpJ ,hich
type of anchor was the leapingJ ,hy was the onset of
consciousness immediately followed by a transition into the
stencil< i.e.< the real body< though not completelyJ ,hich
separation techni'ue helped him to get out of his body againJ
,hich techni'ue was used for deepeningJ ,hich techni'ue for
materiali>ing an ob5ect was used correctlyJ ,hat should the
procedure for obtaining information ha9e been started withJ ,hat
importance does a polite attitude towards elderly women in the
phase ha9eJ ,hy was the return to body possibleJ ,hat did
6le1ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the
foulJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 6le1ander described an entry
into the phase through dream consciousness. %y and large< the
onset of consciousness was facilitated by prior work with the
1.2
cueing program< which< though it failed to yield results<
strengthened the necessary intention to enter the phase. The
leaping that accompanied the onset of consciousness may be
compared with the sensations of le9itation that often lead to
practitioners achie9ing dream consciousness. !ince the techni'ues
for deepening and maintaining were not used at the moment of
dream consciousness< a return to the body< though partial<
naturally occurred.
4urthermore< 6le1ander managed to apply a separation
techni'ue that most resembled climbing out. =e then managed to
deepen correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a
result. *espite the lack of a plan of action< the practitioner
competently decided to do something useful and employed the
techni'ue of finding through a door in order to locate an animate
source of information. =e should ha9e first tried to test the sub5ect
by asking special 'uestions to determine if the ob5ect would be
able to pro9ide information :see "hapter 12;.
%eing polite to animate ob5ects in the phase is the
prerogati9e of each person on an indi9idual basis< but it hardly
has any real basis. Most likely< the return to the body was
triggered by a failure to maintain< e1cessi9e thinking< or
temporary passi9ity. 7pon e1iting the phase< 6le1ander should
ha9e tried to immediately return. =owe9er< he failed to do so<
e9en though he had returned to the phase after e1iting dream
consciousness. !uch a step should ha9e been ob9ious due to an
incomplete connection to the body.
(o; !1
Bori$ Be"der
)ovie Tech"icia": E>perie"ced Practitio"er of the Pha$e;
)o$co9: Ru$$ia
+ "eca#e conscious in #y drea# al#ost i##ediately after
falling asleep) + $as in #y apart#ent standing in the corridor)
Being surprised "y having so suddenly found #yself in the phase,
+ started to touch the $alls $ith #y hands to test their fir#ness
or, Orealness,O as $ell as to intensify the phase "y touching) +
entered the roo#) There $as a "ed standing ne,t to the $all, $ith
#y #other sleeping on it) + could not see her face, only her "ody
1.1
under the "lan%et) The roo# and corridor $ere e,act replicas of
their real-life counterparts)
:hile thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other, + suddenly
started to feel so#e$hat uneasy) :hen + approached the $indo$,
+ sa$ a grotes9ue landscape "ehind it that $as si#ilar to pictures
fro# #ovies a"out catastrophes/ a $asteland, houses in ruins,
odd pileups of "uilding #aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age,
craters fro# e,plosions here and there, and + noticed hu#an
figures in so#e places)
Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that + $as ta%ing in a
panora#ic vie$ Cthe vie$ fro# the $indo$ spanned 1I degrees
and cut off at the hori1on, $hich is in fact al#ost e,actly as the
vie$ fro# #y apart#ent is in real life0, + turned "ac% into the
roo# and started to touch the $ardro"e, and then %nelt do$n to
touch the floor) .ll the $hile, #y fear had "een gro$ing stronger
and stronger/ "oth out of thin%ing a"out #y sleeping #other and
due to the vie$ fro# the $indo$) .n,iety turned into real fear
$ithin a #atter of several seconds, and then graduated into
terror and panic) + lost the a"ility to thin% critically) + had only
one thought/ + had to go "ac% to #y "ody) + darted "ac% to #y "ed
and suddenly found #yself lying on it) + closed #y eyes, "ut could
not understand if + $ere in #y real "ody or still in the phase) My
terror gre$ even stronger $hen + half-opened #y eyes and sa$
that #y #other $as getting up fro# her "ed) She loo%ed li%e a
character fro# a horror #ovie and apparently $as hostile to #e)
+ $anted to disappear, dissolve, and $a%e up2 + hectically
tried to recall the techni9ues for an e#ergency e,it fro# the
phase, "ut $ith poor results/ + tried to free1e, rela, and touch #y
fingers to #y toes in order to feel a connection $ith #y real "ody)
.t so#e #o#ents + felt li%e + had it, thin%ing, &The connection
had "een restored2* + opened #y eyes, "ut reali1ed that + $as still
in the phase $hen + sa$ that the roo# had changed, and $as no$
a$ash $ith gar"age)
The fact that the atte#pts %ept ending $ith false
a$a%enings $as driving #e cra1y) + $as especially shoc%ed $hen
+ got up after one of the false a$a%enings and sa$ #y #other
standing at #y "ed, still loo%ing threateningly at #e, li%e a
1.2
va#pire or a 1o#"ie fro# a horror #ovie) Flus, she started to
reach out to$ard #e $ith her hands2
+ nevertheless %ept on and tried to free1e and $iggle #y
toes, this ti#e $ithout opening #y eyes, and not chec%ing $here +
$as) + started to cal# do$n after so#e ti#e, "ut + $as una"le to
feel #y real "ody, $hich $as confir#ed "y the fact that sounds
$ere co#ing in fro# the phase/ + heard sparro$s chirping
outside the $indo$, though it reality it $as too late for sparro$s
to "e out) 5o$ever, the chirping and the associations that it
"rought Ci)e) day, $ar#th, sparro$s, and sun0, pro"a"ly helped
#e a lot and cal#ed #e do$n, as + finally #anaged to sense #y
real "ody and found #yself in reality) 4evertheless, after + got up,
+ i##ediately started to verify for a"out half a #inute that + $as
no longer in the phase "y touching o"6ects, #a%ing sure that they
$ere hard, and feeling all of #y "odily sensations)
-ue$tio"$8 ,hy was there a risk that %oris could return to
his body when taking in the 9iew from the windowJ =ow could
%oris ha9e e1amined the panoramic 9iew from the window
without worrying about a foulJ ,hich techni'ue for deepening
and AmaintainingB was employed se9eral timesJ ,hat would
ha9e happened if %oris translocated from the source of the fear to
another placeJ =ow could he ha9e o9ercome this problemJ ,hy
was %oris unable to easily e1it the phase and why were all of the
techni'ues that he knew of no practical useJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 ,hen e1amining distant
ob5ects in the phase< there is always a risk of returning to one8s
body because the acti9ity is rela1ing and rela1ation is detrimental
to the length of a phase. %oris could ha9e continued to take in the
9iew by simultaneously keeping up 9ibrations< periodically
e1amining his hands< or rubbing them together. *uring the entire
length of %oris8s phase< he performed sensory amplification by
touching to deepen and maintain the phase.
&f he tried to run away from his mother to another place in
the phase< she probably would ha9e caught up with him there
anyway. =e should ha9e tried to yell at her in an aggressi9e tone.
This would ha9e helped him to o9ercome his fear and either scare
the ob5ect away or make it more agreeable. Problems with an
emergency e1it from the phase arose because it was the beginning
1.)
of the night and the mind still needed to dream and< thus< kept
pulling him into that process.
(o; !?
Ale>ei Te$le"ko
IT E"#i"eer: E>perie"ced Practitio"er of the Pha$e;
)o$co9: Ru$$ia
.ctually, + $as not planning to travel that night, "ut $hen
+ $o%e up around #idnight + decided to try to enter the phase
nevertheless) + started to perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y
ar#s, "ut then a strong sleepy lethargy overca#e #e and +
suddenly $anted to give up #y atte#pts to enter the phase and
si#ply fall asleep) 5o$ever, + $as persistent and continued to
perfor# phanto# #ove#ents $ith #y ar#s) +nstead of feeling the
usual vi"rations that occur $hen this techni9ue is perfor#ed, +
si#ply fell asleep and continued the phanto# #ove#ents $hile
drea#ing) Because of that, #y consciousness apparently did not
fall asleep co#pletely, and + "eca#e a$are that + $as drea#ing)
+ i##ediately cli#"ed out of #y "ody) There $as no
vision, conscious a$areness $as no #ore than ;<, so the phase
$as not that deep) +n order to #aintain the phase, + i##ediately
started chaotically touching everything around #e) +t helped)
Gision ca#e, though it $as #ur%y) + then found #yself in #y
apart#ent) + decided to strive to deepen) 7ach ti#e that +
e,ercised that techni9ue, the phase "eca#e deeper and deeper)
.fter + had achieved a sta"le phase, + decided that it $ould "e
good to gra" a snac% and headed for the fridge) + should add that
+ $as on a strict diet at the ti#e and $as craving so#ething s$eet
or fried) 5o$ever, $hen + opened the fridge, + $as 9uite
disappointed) There $as a lot of food in the fridge, "ut all of it
re9uired preparation Cra$ #eat, fish, dill, etc)0) 5o$ever, there
$as a "ottle of spar%ling #ineral $ater on a special lo$er shelf
in the fridge) :ithout giving it any thought, + too% the "ottle and
started to chug it)
.ll of the sensations $ere 6ust as in real life/ + felt the
"u""les fro# the car"onation, that peculiar taste that #ineral
$ater has, and also ho$ the $ater $ent do$n #y throat) +n
general, everything $as 9uite realistic, though there $as no
1.+
sensation of #y sto#ach filling up $ith $ater and, #oreover, the
$ater felt so#e$hat dry) +t sounds funny, "ut that very feeling of
$ater3s dryness spoiled #y overall i#pression so#e$hat) .fter a
foul, + reali1ed that a possi"le reason for this #ight have "een
dryness in the #outh of #y real "ody)
'sually, if there are, for e,a#ple, candies in the %itchen or in the
fridge, + actually ta%e a handful of the# and consu#e the# $hile
traveling through the phase)
.fter going to the fridge, + $anted to see so#ething
interesting) + decided to e#ploy the techni9ue for creating o"6ects
and people, and so + closed #y eyes and focused on the i#age of
a girl $ho# + $anted to see at that very #o#ent) + affir#ed #y
desire, and + then opened #y eyes, concentrating on the area to
#y side) The air gre$ #isty at first, and then the person + $as
e,pecting #ateriali1ed out of the air, and ca#e to life, see#ingly
fully autono#ous and $ith free $ill - she had the sa#e #anner of
spea%ing as in real life, and acted in the sa#e $ay) The foul
happened $hile #y conversation $ith the girl $as in full s$ingP
-ue$tio"$8 ,hich type of the techni'ue did 6le1ei
ultimately useJ ,hy did lethargy and drowsiness arise during
phantom wigglingJ ,hat should be done in this type of situationJ
,hat was most likely lacking when the indirect techni'ue was
performed< and why did the e1perience end with 6le1ei falling
asleepJ ,hat techni'ues for deepening were usedJ ,hat could
ha9e been done to 'uickly fill the fridge with ready0to0eat foodJ
,hich techni'ue for finding an ob5ect was used with regard to the
girlJ ,hat else could ha9e been used for the same purpose<
considering 6le1eiCs actionsJ ,hat should ha9e been done
immediately after the foulJ =ow many practical applications of
the phase did 6le1ei manage to tryJ
A"$9er$ a"d %o77e"t$8 The entry to the phase
happened because 6le1ei had become aware that he was
dreaming while he rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and
drowsiness o9er the course of the unsuccessful attempt with the
indirect techni'ue of phantom wiggling. 7sually< such drowsiness
signifies that a phase is approaching< signaling a need for
aggression< acti9eness and attention in order to o9ercome inertia
and enter the phase. =owe9er< attenti9eness was lacking< so
1.5
6le1ei fell asleep. =owe9er< his desire to enter the phase was so
strong that the phantom wiggling continued e9en while he was
dreaming< causing him to e1perience dream consciousness.
6mong techni'ues employed for deepening were sensory
amplification through touching and 5ogging. &t would ha9e been
sufficient to employ the techni'ue of finding through a door to
ensure that the fridge was properly stocked. 4or e1ample< 6le1ei
should ha9e closed the door on the refrigerator< focused his
attention on a full stock of snacks and food< and then opened the
door to disco9er that e9erything he8d en9isioned was there.
The techni'ue for finding an ob5ect through
transformation was used to make the girl appear< but this
techni'ue should be considered only by e1perienced practitioners
because it can lead to a foul in case of insufficient concentration.
%efore employing the techni'ue< 6le1ei shut his eyes< and only
then imagined the girl right in front of him. =e could ha9e
immediately created her using the techni'ue of closed eyes< which
usually is easier to do since there is no direct 9isual contact with
surroundings.
7pon returning to his body< he should ha9e tried to
separate again. 6ltogether< 6le1ei managed to and make progress
in two specific< applied tasks< though did not complete them
satisfactorily.
E0ER%ISES FOR %'APTER !1
Ta$k$
Try to assess the e1periences described abo9e using the rubric
below. The answers are located in the appendi1.
<-Poi"t Sy$te7 for A$$e$$i"# the -uality
of Out-of-Body E>perie"ce$ 4Pha$e$5
*eliberate entry into the phase using any techni'ue P1
The phase world was realistic or was made realistic P1
Phase was of a9erage or abo9e0a9erage duration :2
minutes or more;
P1
*eliberate use of the phase to work towards a specific P1
1.-
goal
*eliberately studying the phase or e1perimenting with it
while in it.
P1
&f there is some doubt any regarding any item< only half a point
should be awarded.
1.(
%hapter !? - Putti"# a Face o" the
Phe"o7e"o"
STEP'E( ,ABERGE
!tephen Da%erge was born in 1.+( in
the 7nited !tates. 6t the age of 1.< he
recei9ed a %achelor8s *egree in mathematics
from 6ri>ona !tate 7ni9ersity< after which he
enrolled as a graduate student in the
"hemistry program at !tanford 7ni9ersity. &n
1.-.< he took an academic lea9e of absence.
=e returned to !tanford in 1.(( and
began studying the human mind< including
sub5ects related to dreaming. Da%erge recei9ed his Ph.*. in
psychophysiology in 1.32. =e founded the Ducidity &nstitute in
1.3(.
!tephen Da%erge has made the largest scientific
contribution to the study of phase states. &t suffices to say that
Da%erge was the first in the world to pro9e during a full0fledged
scientific e1periment that it is possible to become conscious while
dreaming This was done through logging specific signals made
with the eyes by a person dreaming while sleeping under
measurement instruments. These e1periments also pro9ed that eye
mo9ement in the physical body and percei9ed body are
synchronous.
Mucid 8rea#ing< first published in 1.35< is Da%ergeCs
most well0known book. 7,ploring the :orld of Mucid 8rea#ing,
a book that Da%erge wrote with =oward Rheingold< was
published in 1..2. &t was mainly thanks to the efforts of Da%erge
that mind0machines for achie9ing dream consciousness were
created< such as *reamDight< /o9a*reamer< and *reamMaker.
1.3
The key feature of Da%erge8s work and achie9ements is an
absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon.
6rguably< he is one of the few authors and researchers totally
lacking in irrationality. 9erything that can be read and learned
from his books is 9erifiable and accessible for e9eryone< with no
peddling of out0of0this0world superpowers.
%AR,OS %ASTA(EA
*ue to "arlos "astaneda8s desire to
follow the spiritual practice of the ,arrior8s
Path< which entails erasing one8s personal
history< the details of his biography are
unclear. 6s far as "astaneda8s early years are
concerned< it can only be stated that he was
born outside of the 7nited !tates sometime
between 1.25 and 1.)5. =e enrolled at the
7ni9ersity of "alifornia< Dos 6ngeles :7"D6; in the 1.-2s<
where he recei9ed a Ph.*. in anthropology on the basis of his
books.
"astaneda8s entire life path was de9oted to studying the
teachings of a certain Luan Matus or don Luan "achora. &t is more
than likely that his persona is a composite0image of an &ndian
!haman< a sorcerer< and an heir of the culture of the ancient
AToltecsB.
"astaneda wrote a do>en books@ howe9er< the book The
.rt of 8rea#ing :1..); has the most to do with the phase state. &t
contains se9eral effecti9e techni'ues for entering the phase
through dream consciousness. =is sub5ect matter is soaked in a
large amount of mysticism and 9irtually de9oid of any
pragmatism.
*espite the fact that the main orientation of "astaneda8s
work did not touch upon the phase state< he ne9ertheless became
one of the founding fathers of this field< as his general popularity
reached massi9e proportions worldwide.
"arlos "astaneda passed away in 1..3.
ROBERT A; )O(ROE
1..
Robert Monroe was born in the 7nited
!tates in 1.15. &n 1.)(< he graduated from
Ohio !tate 7ni9ersity with a degree in
ngineering. =e worked for some time as a
radio program producer and director until he
established his own radio company in /ew
Oork< which rapidly e1panded.
&n 1.5-< his company also conducted a
study about the effect of sound wa9es on the
abilities of the mind.
&n 1.53< Monroe had an accidental personal e1perience
with the phase phenomenon< which strongly stoked his interest in
the sub5ect to which he would de9ote his entire career. &n 1.(+< he
founded the Monroe &nstitute< which was entirely de9oted to
studying unusual states of consciousness and the ability to
influence them through audio stimulation and other technologies.
One of its main achie9ements was the creation of the =emi0!ync
system< which was designed to help a person reach altered states
of consciousness< including out0of0body states< by synchroni>ing
the two hemispheres of the brain.
=is first book< Journeys Out of the Body< was published in
1.(1. Two books then followed? Far Journeys :1.35; and
'lti#ate Journey :1..+;.
Robert Monroe has< so far< made the largest contribution
toward populari>ing the phase state. =owe9er< he understood the
phase more as an actual e1it of the mind from the body< which is
why the term Aout0of0body e1perienceB :O%; was introduced.
The book Journeys Out of the Body was such a massi9e success
that Monroe 'uickly became an undisputed authority in the field.
=owe9er< the large influence of mysticism on Monroe8s
work and 9iews cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent
after his second book. The ma5ority of phenomena described in
the book ha9e not been 9erified in practice. The only attempt at
conducting a full0fledged scientific e1periment pro9ing that the
mind left the body was unsuccessful. &n the end< typical
misconceptions about the phase became widespread< as did
awareness of the e1istence of out0of0body e1periences.
222
Robert Monroe passed away in 1..5.
PATRI%IA GARFIE,
Patricia $arfield was born in 1.)+ in the
7nited !tates. 4rom the age of 1+< she kept an
uninterrupted daily dream 5ournal that would
allow her and all of humanity great insight into
dreams phenomena associated with the phase.
!he was one of the founders of The
6ssociation for the !tudy of *reams. *r.
$arfield holds a Ph.*. in clinical psychology.
!he is the author of a great number of books< with the
1.(+ best0seller ?reative 8rea#ing being the most widely
lauded. &t was one of the first pieces of literature to approach the
phase state in a practical and non0specialist way< and recei9ed
worldwide interest and appreciation. The book contains good
practical guidelines and also describes the dreaming practices of
9arious cultures.
S*,3A( ).,OO(
!yl9an Muldoon was born in the
7nited !tates in 1.2). =e is considered to be
the 6merican pioneer in the study of the
phase< although he used the esoteric term
astral. =e inad9ertently woke up in the phase
at the age of 12< where he saw a cord
connecting his percei9ed body to his real
body. Muldoon first thought that he was dying
during the e1perience< although he e9entually
concluded that this was an instance of Aastral pro5ectionB. =e had
repeated e1perience with the phenomenon< but Muldoon was still
unable to become an ad9anced practitioner due to a lack of full
control o9er the practice.
6fter coordinating efforts with =ereward "arrington< the
famous 6merican in9estigator of the unknown< the two published
the sensational< 5ointly authored book The Fro6ection of the .stral
221
Body in 1.2.. The authors published two other books? The ?ase
for .stral Fro6ection :1.)-; and The Fheno#ena of .stral
Fro6ection :1.51;.
*espite a large ser9ing of esotericism< Muldoon8s books<
:especially the first one; contain a lot of helpful< practical
information and e1planation of the most di9erse phenomena that
can occur during the phase. =owe9er< Muldoon is considered to
be the greatest populari>er of irrational esoteric terms and
theories< which subse'uently became 'uite widespread.
!yl9an Muldoon passed away in 1.(1.
%'AR,ES ,EABEATER
"harles Deadbeater was born in
ngland in 13+( :135+ according to some
sources;. 6fter dropping out of O1ford due to
hard times< Deadbeater became an ordained
priest< but then became 'uite acti9e in the
occult. This led to his becoming a member of
the Theosophical !ociety in 133). Deadbeater
became one of its most famous participants.
The combination of a bright mind<
scientific knowledge< and interest in the
paranormal led him to publish many books on many di9erse
topics. One of them< 8rea#s/ :hat They .re and 5o$ They .re
?aused :13.3;< was one of the first works to touch upon the
phenomenon of the phase. Deadbeater8s writing is saddled with a
ton of esoteric terms and theories. &n it< the term astral plane is
predominantly used for the phase. /e9ertheless< the book is not
without some helpful guidelines concerning techni'ues.
"harles Deadbeater passed away in 1.)+.
ROBERT BR.%E
Robert %ruce was born in ngland in 1.55. =e has
performed his lifeCs work while li9ing in 6ustralia. 6fter studying
and promoting dissociati9e phenomena for many years< by the
beginning of the 21
st
century he had become one of the leading
222
authorities in the field. =e is also a specialist in many other
paranormal fields of study.
Robert %ruce wrote se9eral books< the most
important and well known of which is .stral
8yna#ics :1...;. The author holds 'uite
open esoteric 9iews< which are 9ery strongly
reflected in his theories and terminology. The
helpful< practical guidelines in his books are
'uite often loaded with a large amount of
information that has not been 9erified or
pro9en by anyone. Robert %ruce is also a
propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes concerning the
phase phenomenon.
RI%'AR WEBSTER
Richard ,ebster was born in /ew
Qealand< where he still resides.
=e is the author of about 52
publications that ha9e sold many millions of
copies around the world. =owe9er< only one
of them< .stral Travel for Beginners< is
completely de9oted to the phase state. The
book is saturated with widespread
misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and misguided
theories trying to e1plain it. The techni'ue0related aspect of the
book is also presented ineffecti9ely.
&t is 'uite likely that the author himself has no practical
e1perience< which can also be said for the contents of his other
do>ens of books de9oted to 9arious topics.
%'AR,ES TART
"harles Tart was born in the 7nited !tates in 1.)(. =e
recei9ed his Ph. *. in psychology in 1.-) at the 7ni9ersity of
/orth "arolina. Tart also recei9ed training at !tanford 7ni9ersity.
=e was one of the founders of transpersonal psychology.
22)
=e became one of the most preeminent
researchers of unusual states of awareness
after the publication of .ltered States of
?onsciousness :1.-.;< the first book that he
worked on. &t was one of the first books to
e1amine entering the phase through dream
consciousness. The book recei9ed
popularity when the use D!* and Mari5uana
were often 9iewed as 9ehicles to ele9ated
consciousness< and the book e9en describes the use of chemical
substances in the conte1t of phase states.
22+
%hapter !@ & Fi"al Te$t
The 'uestions on the test may ha9e one or more correct
answers< or none of the answers may be correct. Thus< the
'uestions must be read completely through< and attention must be
paid to their implications and finer points.
6 student8s theoretical knowledge is considered to be
satisfactory if the correct answers to at least one0half of the
'uestions are gi9en. &f a score of less than 52E is recei9ed< a
student should study the weak points again or re0read the entire
guidebook. Otherwise< it is 'uite probable that fundamental
mistakes will be made< which will in turn interfere with indi9idual
practice.
&f a score of at least 32E is achie9ed< then a theoretical
knowledge of the practice is at an ad9anced le9el< which will
surely ha9e a positi9e effect on the practitioner8s direct
e1periences in the phase.
6nswers are in the appendi1 at the end of the guidebook.
!; (oi$e a"d reali$tic i7a#e$ u"e>pectedly ari$e 9he"
perfor7i"# the i"direct tech"i2ue of pha"to7 9i##li"#; What
ca" be do"e+
6; "ontinue with phantom wiggling.
%; !witch to obser9ing images or listening in.
"; Try to do all or some of the techni'ues
simultaneously.
*; "hoose the techni'ue with the strongest precursors
and continue with that one.
225
1; A practitio"er u"i"te"tio"ally ope"$ the eye$ for $everal
$eco"d$ upo" a9ake"i"#; What i$ the be$t 9ay to $tart
i"direct tech"i2ue$ fro7 i" thi$ ca$e+
6; 6ttempting to separate.
%; The obser9ing images techni'ue.
"; The rapid eye mo9ement techni'ue.
*; The forced falling asleep techni'ue.
; &t8s best to not start any techni'ue and fall back to
sleep with the intention of reawakening and trying to do
e9erything again without first mo9ing.
?; Which actio"$ are preferable for perfor7i"# a direct
tech"i2ue before falli"# a$leep for the "i#ht after a lo"#
period of $leep deprivatio" or e>hau$tio"+
6; Monotonously performing the obser9ing images
techni'ue.
%; %eing attenti9e and concentrating on actions.
"; The absence of a free0floating state of consciousness.
*; Nuickly alternating techni'ues.
; =igh0'uality rela1ation.
@; )ild vibratio"$ occur 9he" perfor7i"# a direct tech"i2ue;
%a" the $trai"i"# the brai" tech"i2ue be u$ed to a7plify the
vibratio"$+
6; Oes.
%; /o.
"; &t may be used< but for practical purposes 0 only
when a practitioner is e1hausted or sleep0depri9ed.
*;&t may be used< as long as the attempt to enter the
phase is not being made during the day
<; Which of the actio"$ #ive" belo9 i"crea$e the likelihood of
e"teri"# the pha$e throu#h drea7 co"$ciou$"e$$ 9he" u$ed
ri#ht before falli"# a$leep+
6; Performing direct techni'ues.
%; &ntending to perform indirect techni'ues upon
awakening.
"; Recalling dreams from the night before.
22-
*; "reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance
to the phase in such a way.
B; If a9are"e$$ occur$ at the very la$t 7o7e"t of a drea7 that
fade$ a9ay: 9hich of the actio"$ #ive" belo9 $hould be
u"dertake" i" order to e"ter the pha$e a$ $oo" a$ po$$ible+
6; Try to fall asleep again in order to once again
become self0aware while dreaming.
%; &mmediately perform indirect techni'ues.
"; Take a break and perform direct techni'ues later.
*; !tart to recall that night8s dreams.
C; Which of the$e are 7o$t likely to produce a 2uick pha$e
e"try 9he" a9ake"i"# i" a $tate of $leep paraly$i$+
6; Rela1ation.
%; 4alling asleep with the intention of becoming self0
aware while in a dream.
"; Mo9ing the physical eyes and tongue.
*; *irect techni'ues.
D; What $hould be do"e 9he" $po"ta"eou$ly thro9" fro7 the
body 9hile lyi"# do9" or 9aki"# up i" the 7iddle of the
"i#ht+
6; Return to the body and perform appropriate
separation techni'ues.
%; &mplement a predetermined plan of action for the
phase.
"; *eepen immediately.
*; Try to 'uickly establish 9ision< if it is not already
present.
*; mploy the forced falling asleep techni'ue.
F; While tryi"# to e"ter the pha$e: rolli"# out 9ork$ at fir$t:
but o"ly partially: a"d the 7ove7e"t ca""ot be e>te"ded a"y
further "o 7atter 9hat effort i$ 7ade; What i$ it be$t to do i"
thi$ $ituatio"+
6; Try to turn back and roll out further once again< and
repeat se9eral times.
22(
%; !tart doing cycles of indirect techni'ues.
"; Take a break and try to separate after se9eral
minutes.
*; Try to separate by le9itating< getting up< or climbing
out.
; 7se any indirect techni'ue for phase entry and
attempt rolling out again.
!H; A practitio"er u"e>pectedly #et$ $tuck i" the floor or 9all
9hile rolli"# out; What $hould be do"e to re$u7e the pha$e+
6; 4orce through the obstacle.
%; mploy translocation techni'ues.
"; 6ttempt to return to the body and roll out again.
*; %ecome able to locate an e1it from the problem.
; Perform sensory amplification.
!!; 'o9 7ay a practitio"er deepe" the pha$e 9hile flyi"#
throu#h a dark for7le$$ $pace 9hile $eparati"#+
6; mploy the techni'ue of falling headfirst.
%; There is no way to do this.
"; "reate and amplify 9ibrations.
*; %egin self0palpation.
; Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it
through sensory amplification.
!1; If deepe"i"# tech"i2ue$ do "ot co7pletely 9ork 9ithi" !<
to ?H $eco"d$: 9hat ca" be do"e+
6; "ontinue trying to go deeper.
%; 1it from the phase.
"; 6ttempt to return to the body and once use phase
entrance techni'ues.
*; Proceed to performing predetermined actions.
!?; Which tech"i2ue or 9ay of 7ai"tai"i"# the pha$e $hould
be u$ed 9he" teleporti"# $o7e9here 9ith clo$ed eye$+
6; The techni'ue of amplifying and maintaining
9ibrations.
223
%; Tactile sensory amplification< feeling the sensation
of rubbing the hands together.
"; /o techni'ue.
*; The techni'ue of rotation.
; Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase.
!@; I" 9hich $ituatio"$ i$ falli"# a$leep i" the pha$e 7o$t
likely+
6; ,hen looking for a desired person.
%; ,hen communicating with animate ob5ects.
"; ,hen completely calm< ha9ing completely halted all
acti9ity.
*; ,hen tra9elling aimlessly.
; ,hen taking part in side e9ents.
!<; Which of the follo9i"# i"dicator$ #uara"tee$ that the
pha$e ha$ bee" e>ited for reality+
6; 6 clock shows the right time< and the same time
e9en if a practitioner turns away from it and then looks at
it again.
%; !ensations are completely realistic.
"; The presence of friends or family in the room who
communicate with the practitioner.
*; 6n inner feeling that the phase has ended.
; /othing happens after staring at the end of a finger
from close distance for fi9e to 12 seconds.
!B; I" 9hich $ituatio"$ $hould travelli"# i" the pha$e be
deliberately di$co"ti"ued+
6; ,hen a fear that a return will be impossible< or a
direct fear of death arises.
%; ,hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner
will be late for something in the physical world.
"; ,hen frightened by some strange e9ents or ob5ects.
*; ,hen there is an ine1plicable mortal fear of
something unknown or incomprehensible.
; &f someone in the phase strongly insists that the
practitioner should return to reality.
22.
4; &f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by
interaction with ob5ects in the phase world.
!C; What 9ill 7o$t likely occur 9he" tryi"# to evade $o7e
a9ful bei"# or da"#erou$ per$o"+
6; The ob5ect will get bored and stop.
%; 4ear of the ob5ect will go away.
"; The phase will occur more fre'uently< as well as be
longer and deeper than usual.
*; The practitioner will become calmer and unner9ed
less fre'uently.
; The more fear there is< the more often the ob5ect will
chase the practitioner.
!D; Whe" $hould e$tabli$hi"# vi$io" i" the pha$e be
co"$idered: if it ha$ "ot occurred o" it$ o9"+
6; &mmediately upon separation without deepening.
%; &mmediately after deepening.
"; ,hile flying through dark space during
translocation.
*; 6fter fi9e to 12 seconds of being sure that a phase
entry has occurred.
; ,hen there is a desire to immediately e1plore the
surroundings after separation has occurred.
!F; 'o9 i$ it po$$ible to pa$$ throu#h a 9all 9hile $ta"di"#
clo$e to it: 9ithout $toppi"# to look at it fro7 clo$e ra"#e+
6; %y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it<
and then the entire body and head.
%; %y gradually pushing the head through it at first< and
then the entire body.
"; %y trying to put a hole in it< and then e1panding the
hole and climbing through it.
*; %y ramming it with a shoulder< trying to bring it
down.

1H; While i" the pha$e: a practitio"er i$ i" a $ituatio" 9here
the ar7$ are totally paraly=ed a"d i77obili=ed; Thi$ happe"$
212
i" a roo7 9ith a $i"#le e>it8 a door that ha$ $tarted to clo$e;
What are the t9o ea$ie$t 9ay$ to keep the door ope"+
6; Order the door to stay open in a loud< imperious< and
asserti9e manner.
%; 4ree the arms and hold back the door.
"; !top the door with telekinesis.
*; "reate a person through the method of finding.
; There is no way to do this.
1!; What difficultie$ 7ay ari$e for a practitio"er i" the pha$e
9hile u$i"# the door tech"i2ue of tra"$locatio"+
6; The door will not open.
%; The wrong place is behind the door.
"; &t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door
handle because the hand goes through the handle.
*; *ifficulties with internal concentration occur at the
critical moment.
; 6 black 9oid often appears on the other side of the
door.
11; What are "ece$$ary co"ditio"$ for #etti"# re$ult$ 9he"
tra"$locati"# i" the pha$e after rolli"# out duri"# i"itial
$eparatio" fro7 the body+
6; 6bsence of 9ision.
%; Practicing after sunset.
"; 6 firm intention to end up somewhere.
*; "ertainty of the final result.
; The presence of 9ibrations.
1?; A practitio"er i$ i" a dark roo7 i" the pha$e 9here
everythi"# i$ poorly vi$ible; There i$ a cha"delier: but "o li#ht
$9itch; 'o9 ca" the $9itch be activated to li#ht the roo7+
6; Translocate through teleportation to the place where
the toggle or switch for the light in 'uestion is located.
%; 4ind a flashlight through the method of finding and
illuminate the room with it.
"; Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier with the hands.
211
*; "reate a light switch in the room using the method of
finding an ob5ect.
; "lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already
lit< and then open the eyes.
1@; Whe" co77u"icati"# 9ith a" a"i7ate obGect i" the pha$e:
a de$ire to add a $pecific per$o" to the $ce"ery ari$e$; Which
of the follo9i"# actio"$ are advi$able o"ly for be#i""er$ i"
thi$ ca$e+
6; Propose going to a neighboring room where the
needed sub5ect will be presented through the use of the
door or corner techni'ue.
%; !ummon the needed person by calling their name
loudly.
"; Translocate back to the same place< and ha9e both
animate ob5ects present there upon your return.
*; 6dd the needed person through the closed eyes
techni'ue.
; 6sk the animate ob5ect that you are talking to if it
does not mind adding someone to the scenery.
1<; Where i$ o"e "ot allo9ed to #o u$i"# tra"$locatio"
tech"i2ue$+
6; &nside a mammoth.
%; To the past or the future.
"; To hea9en.
*; To an episode of the mo9ie Star :ars.
1B; 'o9 9ill a decea$ed per$o" differ fro7 a prototype i" the
pha$e 9he" correctly perfor7i"# the tech"i2ue for fi"di"#
the per$o"+
6; Only the practitioner himself can con5ure up
differences< or not see or percei9e them.
%; The deceased will ha9e a different timbre of 9oice.
"; There will be a radiant halo around the deceased8s
head.
*; Physical perception of the deceased will be less
realistic than in real life.
212
; The deceased will not remember anything.
1C; What difficultie$ ca" ari$e i" the pha$e 9hile obtai"i"#
i"for7atio" fro7 a"i7ate $ource$ of i"for7atio"+
6; &nability to remember information obtained.
%; !ources of information are silent.
"; &nade'uateness of the sources of information.
*; !e1ual attraction< if the source of information is of
the opposite or desired se1.
; %eing gi9en false information.
1D; 'o9 7i#ht a practitio"er accelerate the heali"# proce$$ of
a cold that i$ characteri=ed by a $tuffy "o$e a"d a $ore throat+
6; Maintaining and amplifying 9ibrations for the entire
length of the phase< and entering it o9er se9eral days in a
row.
%; Taking aspirin and entering the phase o9er se9eral
days in a row.
"; Tra9elling to hot places in the phase and entering it
o9er se9eral days in a row.
*; 1periencing stressful situations o9er se9eral phases.
; 4inding a doctor in the phase and asking him what it
is best to do in real0life or e9en in the phase itself.
1F; Which of the follo9i"# achieve7e"t$ belo"# to Stephe"
,aBer#e+
6; 4ounding the Ducidity &nstitute.
%; 6 Ph.*. in anthropology.
"; !cientifically pro9ing that lucid dreaming is possible.
*; 6 Ph.*. in psychophysiology.
; Pro9ing that eye mo9ements in the phase and in
reality are synchroni>ed.
?H; Who of approached the $tudy of the pha$e $tate fro7 a
pra#7atic poi"t-of-vie9 that 9a$ totally devoid of occulti$7+
6; !tephen Da%erge
%; Robert Monroe
"; !yl9an Muldoon
21)
*; "harles Deadbeater
; Patricia $arfield
4; "arlos "astaneda
21+
Appe"di>
ASSESS)E(T OF PRA%TITIO(ERSI
E0PERIE(%ES 4%'APTER !15

These assessments of the practitioners8 e1periences refer
only to the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not
meant as an assessment of their practice as a whole. !ome of
practitioners would easily be able to e1perience successful phases
earning four to fi9e points at other times. This especially concerns
%oris Pronyakin< 6le1ander *yrenko9< %oris %ender< and 6le1ei
Teslenko. This is also possibly true of the other practitioners< with
whom the author is not closely ac'uainted.
/o. 1 %oris Pronyakin # 2.5 points
/o. 2 6le1ei %akhare9 # 2.5 points
/o. ) *mitry Marko9 # 2 points
/o. + &9an Oako9le9 # 1.5 points
/o. 5 /atalya Ho>heno9a # 1 point
/o. - 6le1ander 4urmenko9 # 1 point
/o.( Roman Reuto9 # ) points
/o. 3 6le1ander *yrenko9 # 1.5 points
/o. . !9yatosla9 %arano9 # 2 points
/o. 12 Oleg !ushchenko # 2.5 points
/o. 11 6le1ander Deleko9 # 1.5 points
/o. 12 %oris %ender # 2 points
/o. 1) 6le1ei Teslenko # ) points
215
A(SWERS TO T'E FI(A, TEST 4%'APTER !@5
1. 6<%<"<*
@
2. *@
). %< "< *@
+. "@
5. 6<%<"<*
@
-. %@
(. #
3. "@
.. 6< *< @
12. %< "@
11. 6<"<*<
@
12. 6<*<6P
*@
1). "@
1+. *< @
15. @
1-. %< 4@
1(. "< @
13. %< *@
1.. #
22. 6< "@
21. 6< %< *@
22. 6< "< *@
2). @
2+. %@
25. #@
2-. 6@
2(. %<"<*<@
23. %<"<@
2.. 6<"<*<@
)2. 6< @
A SI)P,IFIE ES%RIPTIO( OF T'E EASIEST
)ET'O FOR E(TERI(G T'E P'ASE
.SI(G I(IRE%T TE%'(I-.ES
7pon awakening< without mo9ing or opening the eyes<
immediately try to separate from oneCs body. The separation
attempt should be carried out without any imagining< but rather
with the desire to make a real mo9ement without straining the
muscles :rolling out< le9itation< standing up< etc.;.
&f separation does not occur within three to fi9e seconds<
immediately try alternating se9eral of the most effecti9e
techni'ues for three to fi9e seconds each. ,hen one of the
techni'ues works< continue it for a longer period of time?
0Obser9ing images? Try to e1amine and discern the
pictures arising before closed eyes.
0Distening in? 6ttempt to hear sounds in the head and
make these louder by listening in or strengthening the will@
0Rotating? &magine rotating around the head0to0foot a1is@
0Phantom wiggling? Try to mo9e a part of the body
without straining the muscles< and try to increase the range of
mo9ement@
21-
0!training the brain? Try straining the brain< which will
lead to 9ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the
brain.
6s soon as one techni'ue clearly starts to work< continue
with it as long as progress is apparent< and then try to separate. &f
separation fails< return to the techni'ue that was working.
*o not gi9e up alternating through techni'ues until one
minute has elapsed< but do not continue for more than two
minutes. !eparation from the body may be attempted periodically<
especially if interesting sensations occur.
TA/E PART I( RESEAR%'
Take part in the research of a techni'ue. The techni'ue of
imagined sensations is described in "hapter 2 in the section on
!econdary Techni'ues. This techni'ue is also commonly known
as the Acell phone techni'ueB. ,hile this guidebook was being
written< e1periments with this techni'ue were conducted at the
!chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el8s seminars. Results were
astounding. *ue to the fact that this techni'ue is easy to
understand and apply in practice< it could be the most
straightforward and effecti9e one for achie9ing the phase state.
6lmost e9ery second attempt made with this techni'ue has
yielded results< pro9ided it is employed as an indirect techni'ue.
*ue to this techni'ue8s huge potential for populari>ing
and spreading knowledge of the phenomenon< anyone who is
interested is in9ited to take part in a global e1periment of the
techni'ue8s effecti9eness. &n addition to testing it< a researcher
may propose the techni'ue to interested persons or post it on the
&nternet to increase the number of practitioners. Please submit the
results of your e1periments with the techni'ue to the e0mail
address? obe4u@obe4u.com
=ere it is?
T'E %E,, P'O(E TE%'(I-.E
21(
The practice of this phase entry techni'ue is to imagine
the sensation that something is resting in the hand< desirably upon
awakening without any physical mo9ement. &t is best to imagine a
cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 'uite
accustomed to this sensation< although any other ob5ect will do. &t
is necessary to acti9ely and attenti9ely focus on the sensations in
the palm of the hand. Most likely< the physical sensation of a
phone lying in the hand will 'uickly arise. The sensation will
become increasingly palpable. &f a sensation does not arise within
12 seconds< the techni'ue not going to work and it is time to
switch to another one.
,hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs< focus
e9ery bit of attention on it. &t should be noted that this will not be
an imagined sensation< but a real one. This should be understood
from the 9ery beginning< and results should be e1pected. Once the
sensation is stable< start feeling the mobile phone with the fingers.
Physical sensations should be e1perienced. The physical body< of
course< must not mo9e or strain. &f this does not work< only focus
attention on the sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to
feel the phone with the fingers later. &f feeling the phone with the
fingers is successful< acti9ely roll the phone around the hand<
feeling all of its details.
6s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in
the hand< separation from the body may be attempted. &n this case
it is usually easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up.
"ontinue to hold the phone and roll it around< which will maintain
the emerging phase state. !eparation in this case should be more
like actually getting up physically or rolling out of bed< rather
than actually separating one thing from something else. That is<
do this in the same way as physically getting out of bed< starting
from the sensation of the phone in the hand.
&f separation is unsuccessful< continue to attenti9ely feel
the phone in the hand for a little while longer and try to separate
again. &f separation happens< the ne1t step is to take actions that
are typical for a phase e1perience? deepening< and then
accomplishing predetermined tasks while performing
AmaintainingB techni'ues. &f only a partial separation occurs< then
separation by force should be attempted.
213
$enerally< the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises
with e9ery second attempt. 4urthermore< achie9ing success only
re'uires e1perience and some de1terity since feeling the sensation
of a phone in the hand signifies that the re'uired state has been
reached and subse'uent actions may be attempted.
ATTE(TIO(A
,hen making attempts to enter the phase<
the practitioner should ha9e complete confidence that he will be
immediately successful in e9erything. 9en a shroud of doubt
will keep the practitioner in his body< this is especially true when
it comes to indirect techni'ues.
4our typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered
by .2E of practicioners?
1 0 4orgetting to deepen the phase
2 0 4orgetting to maintain the phase
) 0 6bsence of a plan of action when in the phase
+ 0 4orgetting to try to re0enter the phase after a foul
T'E S%'OO, OF O.T-OF-BO* TRA3E,
Michael Raduga8s !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el conducts
training seminars in many countries around the world. The
coursework allows students to master the phase phenomenon and
hone their skills at tra9eling in the phase. &nformation on e1isting
21.
branches and seminar schedules are a9ailable on the website
www.obe4u.com. ,e also welcome potential partners interested in
organi>ing !chool of Out0of0%ody Tra9el branches and seminars.
6ll correspondence regarding seminars< partnerships< and
proposals related to the translation of this book may be handled
by e0mail at obe4u@obe4u.com .
BRIEF G,OSSAR* OF TER)S A(
EFI(ITIO(S
Out-of-Body e>perie"ce 4OBE5: lucid drea7i"# 4,5: a$tral &
a number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in
which a person< while being fully conscious< reali>es
consciousness outside the normal range of physical perception.
I"direct tech"i2ue$ # entry into the phase within fi9e minutes of
awakening from sleep of any duration 0 pro9ided there has been
minimal physical mo9ement.
irect tech"i2ue$ # entry into the phase without any prior sleep<
after e1cessi9e physical mo9ement upon awakening< or ha9ing
been awake for at least fi9e minutes.
rea7 %o"$ciou$"e$$ # entry into the phase through becoming
consciously aware while a dream episode is happening.
i$$ociatio" # separation@ in this case< a scientific term
describing e1periences in the phase.
Sleep paraly$i$ # a stupor@ the complete immobili>ation that
often occurs when falling asleep< awakening< and entering or
e1iting the phase.
Ste"cil # the real physical body that is no longer percei9ed while
in the phase.
eepe"i"# the pha$e # methods for making the phase as realistic
as possible by stabili>ing the surrounding space.
)ai"tai"i"# the pha$e # methods for maintaining the phase state
by pre9enting a lapse into sleep< a return to reality< or an imagined
return to reality.
RE) # rapid eye mo9ement sleep :RM phase;@ a sleep phase
that is characteri>ed by increased brain acti9ity that is
accompanied by rapid eye mo9ement and dreaming.
222
Foul # an inad9ertent termination of the phase through a
spontaneous return to e9eryday reality.
%ycle$ of i"direct tech"i2ue$ 00 the easiest way to enter the
phase< employed by rapidly alternating certain techni'ues upon
awakening from sleep until one of them works.
221
.,TI)ATE *OGA
T'E TE%'(O,OG* OF
T'E 1H!1
TRA(SFOR)ATIO(
:%uy on www.obe+u.com;
The lines of this book will close out the life you ha9e led
thus far. Oou ha9e in front of you a gap0closing< cutting0edge and
conscious0awareness raising technology that will allow you to
complete your transformation into the new era. &ts moderni>ed<
secular approach to these ancient technologies brings conscious
awareness outside of the physical world within e9eryoneCs reach.
Thanks to the de9elopment of simple technical
instruments< the practice of freeing oneCs conscious awareness
from the body opens up the widest0possible hori>ons and is the
most promising personal de9elopment technology in e1istence. &
say this for the simple reason there is nothing more useful and
pro9ocati9e out there. This is the long0awaited ne1t step in human
e9olutionary de9elopment. The e1plosi9e propagation of this
practice will also be the trigger for the 2212 transformation.
Michael Raduga
Table of "ontents?

%hapter !
!uperpowers Made 6ccessible

%hapter 1
ntering the Out0of0%ody !tate

%hapter ?
Managing the Out0of0%ody 1perience

222
%hapter @
Practical 6pplications
%hapter <
The 1periences of %eginners
S%'OO, OF O.T-OF-BO*-TRA3E, II
PERSO(A, E0PERIE(%ES
Thi$ book i$ the free$ta"di"# $upple7e"t to The School of
Out-of-Body Travel I Practical !uideboo"# It i$ i"te"ded to
#ive a fir$t-ha"d de7o"$tratio" of the out-of-body e>perie"ce
i" practice: 9hile bri"#i"# atte"tio" to correct actio"$ a"d
7i$take$ 7ade 9he" out-of-body;
:%uy on www.obe+u.com;
&t8s one thing to know which techni'ues can be used to
control and lea9e the perception of the body< but another thing to
actually know how to use those techni'ues. &t8s one thing to read
descriptions of a single indi9idual8s e1periences< but another to
learn about how a large number of other practitioners regard the
techni'ues and feel about them. /ot e9eryone is able to figure out
what e1actly to do and how to do it without reading this book.
Techni'ue0related theory and real e1perience are essentially two
different things.
The power inherent in this collection of personal
practitioner e1periences is such that e9en if you ne9er intend to
try out the techni'ues described in it< you are practically
guaranteed to ne9ertheless encounter this phenomenon< as it will
enter your subconscious mind as a kind of programming that will
sooner or later acti9ate at the right moment. This collection is all
the more beneficial for those who would like to recei9e real
guidance in their e1plorations. 6ll of the fundamental mistakes
22)
that practitioners are prone to make are described and analy>ed
here. =a9ing read the book< the practitioner will be armed with
knowledge of the most distilled and 9erified kind.
&n preparation for this book< the personal e1periences of
hundreds of practitioners were collected at seminars< through the
website< and by mail. =owe9er< only the most demonstrati9e
descriptions were chosen for inclusion. Thus< the selected
descriptions are in9aluable not only for those who ha9e 5ust
started out on their 5ourney with the most e1traordinary practice
of out0of0body tra9el< but also for those who already ha9e
substantial e1perience with it.
& would like to e1press my gratitude to all those who
assisted me in putting together this one0of0a0kind compilation.
Oou ha9e made a contribution to this field of study and it only
remains for me to wish you further success< which will show that
my commentary on your e1periences was right on.
Michael Raduga
Table of "ontents?
Part !
Dea9ing the Perception of the %ody
Part II
Out0of0%ody 1periments
Part III
The 1periences of ,ell0Hnown 6uthors
Part I3
*emonstrati9e "ase !tudies
Appe"di>
22+
This book is free via internet, so feel free to
distribute it!
Send it to all your friends!
Post it on your sites and blogs!
For disability:
The Phase is your new life without any borders
More info about the Phase and Michael Raduga on
WWW!O"#$%!CO&
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other
works of M.Raduga may be sent to obe4u@obe4u.com
225
Watch now
22-
Wanna hear
"Thanks!"?
Just send this e-book
to your best friends!
22(

School of Out of Body Travel A Practical Guidebook by Michael Raduga (OBE, Astran Projection, Soul Travel)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

School of Out of Body Travel A Practical Guidebook by Michael Raduga (OBE, Astran Projection, Soul Travel)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

1

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen